In the Kitch

menu icon
go to homepage
  • Patriotic Recipes
  • Recipe Index
  • Guides
  • Tutorials
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
    • YouTube
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Patriotic Recipes
    • Recipe Index
    • Guides
    • Tutorials
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
    • YouTube
  • ×
    In the Kitch » Recipes

    Pumpkin Galette

    September 8, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Crispy, flaky pastry surrounds a rich pumpkin filling, making this pumpkin galette a delicious savory twist on the classic pumpkin pie. It's served as a side dish or appetizer, so don't plan on eating it for dessert! Try it for Thanksgiving or a fall dinner party.

    Sliced pumpkin galette on wooden plate.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    This Savory Pumpkin Galette is Pure Cozy

    Shallots, goat cheese and fresh thyme bring out the best in a flaky, homemade pastry filled with rich pumpkin purée. This dish feels warm and comforting, and fills your home with an irresistible aroma as it bakes.

    Unlike a traditional deep-dish pie, a galette is free-form with an open, rustic shape and beautifully crisp edges--almost like a pizza. No pie plate, no fuss!

    It's incredibly easy to make--simply spoon the filling into the center of the pastry, then fold it up around the purée. In a little over an hour, you'll have a flat, crispy pastry that's just as tasty warm as it is straight from the fridge the next day.

    That open, rustic look makes it easy to give it a restaurant-quality touch with a simple garnish.

    You can use the same fillings that you use for pies: fresh blueberries, apples or canned pumpkin purée. However, this one leans savory like my potato galette, so don't plan on eating it for dessert!

    I do have a sweet fresh cherry galette, berry galette and raspberry galette recipe if you want to try those, too.

    Ingredients

    Pumpkin galette ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • butter - Make sure it's chilled, not soft.
    • water - The water should also be nice and cold for the best pastry texture.
    • canned pumpkin purée - Do not get confused with pumpkin pie mix--it should not be sweetened.
    • goat cheese - Goat cheese adds some tangy, creamy bite and balances the natural sweetness of the pumpkin. It's great for baking because it doesn't leak a bunch of oil and it gets a little toasty on the edges.
    • shallots - Can also use red onion if you can't find shallots or you're looking for a cheaper option.
    • salt - Table salt, kosher salt or sea salt.
    • fresh thyme leaves - This is an optional garnish--you can experiment with other herbs that go well with pumpkin such as sage, oregano and parsley.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make a Pumpkin Galette

    Cubes of butter in bowl of flour.

    Step 1. Begin making the pastry. In a medium bowl, combine the flour and salt. Add the cubes of butter and cut them into the flour with a fork or your fingers until coarse.

    Galette dough mixture.

    Step 2. Form a ball. Add the egg and 2 tablespoons of cold water and work the mixture together, just until it forms a ball.

    👩🏻‍🍳 Chef's Note: You can add one more tablespoon of cold water, if needed.

    Galette dough flattened and covered in plastic wrap.

    Step 3. Chill. Flatten into a disc, cover with plastic wrap and chill for 30 minutes.

    Galette dough rolled out on floured surface.

    Step 4. Roll dough out. Preheat the oven to 425°F. On a lightly floured surface, roll out the dough into a circle that is approximately 13"-14" in diameter. Transfer to a parchment-lined pan.

    Pumpkin galette dough and filling on baking sheet.

    Step 5. Add pumpkin. Combine the pumpkin purée with the egg and salt. Spread the pumpkin mixture out onto the dough circle, leaving a 2" border of pastry around the outside.

    Unbaked pumpkin galette on sheet pan.

    Step 6. Add toppings and fold. Add the crumbled goat cheese and sliced shallots evenly on top of the pumpkin. Sprinkle with black pepper. Fold the pastry border over the filling. The center of the galette should be left open.

    Baked savory pumpkin galette on sheet pan with pizza cutter on the side.

    Step 7. Bake. Bake for about 30 minutes or until the crust is golden brown. Keep an eye on it.

    Baked and sliced pumpkin galette on wooden board.

    Step 8. Let cool and serve. Remove from the oven and let cool for 10-15 minutes. Sprinkle with fresh thyme leaves. Slice the savory pumpkin galette and serve!

    👩🏻‍🍳 Chef's Note: If you're looking for a beverage to pair it with, try this pumpkin pie martini or fall rum punch.

    Joss' Top Tips

    One of the best things about making a galette, is that it doesn't have to be perfect. In fact, an uneven crust gives your galette pastry more character.

    After you bake your pumpkin galette, let it cool for a bit--it might be hard to resist, but the filling could burn your tongue if you bite into it too quickly. It also gives the filling a chance to set.

    Remember to keep the ingredients for the pastry chilled for best results. It's one of the secrets to tender, flaky, bakery-style pastry.

    Pumpkin Galette Storage

    • Fridge: Afterward, cover the leftovers with plastic wrap and store them in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Freezer: Freeze the pumpkin galette for up to 3 months. Make sure to cool it first and cover well.
    • Reheat: You can reheat the pumpkin galette in the oven or microwave or simply eat it cold. If frozen, you can either thaw it in the fridge first overnight or heat it up from frozen in a 350°F oven for about 15 minutes or until heated through.
    Sliced pumpkin galette on parchment.

    More Fall Favorites to Consider

    • Creamy tuna macaroni casserole in baking dish.
      Creamy Tuna Macaroni Casserole
    • Moist, frosted pumpkin cupcakes on yellow plate.
      Super Moist Pumpkin Cupcakes
    • Pumpkin spice coffee creamer pouring into glass mug of coffee.
      Homemade Pumpkin Spice Coffee Creamer
    • Chicken pasty pie slice on clear glass plate with a fork.
      Chicken Pasty Pie

    If you tried this Pumpkin Galette Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Pumpkin galette sliced into quarters on wooden plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 6 votes

    Pumpkin Galette

    Crispy, flaky pastry surrounds a rich pumpkin filling, making this pumpkin galette a delicious savory twist on the classic pumpkin pie. It's served as a side dish or appetizer, so don't plan on eating it for dessert! Try it for Thanksgiving or a fall dinner party.
    Course Appetizer, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine American, French
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 267kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Rimmed pizza pan

    Ingredients

    For the Pastry

    • 1 ⅓ cups AP flour
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup cold butter cubed
    • 1 egg
    • 2 tablespoons cold water

    For the Filling

    • 2 cups canned pumpkin purée
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 5 ounces goat cheese crumbled (about ¾ cup)
    • ¼ cup shallots sliced
    • freshly ground black pepper to taste

    To Serve

    • fresh thyme leaves
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, combine the flour and salt. Add the cubes of butter and cut them into the flour with a fork or your fingers until coarse.
      1 ⅓ cups AP flour, ½ teaspoon salt, ½ cup cold butter
    • Add the egg and 2 tablespoons of cold water and work the mixture together, just until it forms a ball (adding one more tablespoon of cold water if needed). Flatten into a disc, cover with plastic wrap and chill for 30 minutes.
      1 egg, 2 tablespoons cold water
    • Preheat oven to 425°F and line a baking sheet or pizza pan with parchment paper.
    • On a lightly floured surface, roll out the dough into a circle that is approximately 13"-14" in diameter. Transfer to the parchment-lined pan.
    • Combine the pumpkin purée with the egg and salt. Spread the pumpkin mixture out onto the dough circle, leaving a 2" border of pastry around the outside.
      2 cups canned pumpkin purée, 1 large egg, 1 teaspoon salt
    • Add the crumbled goat cheese and sliced shallots evenly on top of the pumpkin. Sprinkle with black pepper. Fold the pastry border over the filling. The center of the galette should be left open.
      5 ounces goat cheese, ¼ cup shallots
    • Bake for about 30 minutes or until the crust is golden brown. Keep an eye on it. Remove from the oven and let cool for 10-15 minutes.
    • Sprinkle with fresh thyme leaves. Slice and serve!

    Video

    Notes

    • Dough Tip: The dough does not have to be rolled out into a perfect circle because it is meant to be rustic, but you can trim the edges for a cleaner edge if that is important to you.
    • Fridge storage: Afterward, cover the leftovers with plastic wrap and store them in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Freezer storage: Freeze for up to 3 months. Make sure to cool it first and cover well.
    • To Reheat: You can heat the galette up again in the oven or microwave or simply eat it cold. If frozen, you can either thaw it in the fridge first overnight or heat it up from frozen in a 350°F oven for about 15 minutes or until heated through.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 267kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 82mg | Sodium: 546mg | Potassium: 197mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 10134IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 57mg | Iron: 2mg

    Peach Tarte Tatin (Video)

    September 1, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This peach tarte tatin is an easy, delicious, one-pan dessert! As the peaches simmer in the butter and sugar over the stove, they absorb a delicious caramel sauce as well as release their juices, giving the sauce a hit of peach flavor.

    Peach Tarte Tatin on a marble and wooden serving board, purple flowers in the background.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    An Elegant Peach Dessert

    This dessert is a luscious, elegant French dessert featuring caramelized peaches atop a buttery, flaky pastry crust. The sugar and butter caramelize the peaches while they're cooking so you don't have to take any extra steps. Just cook the peaches, add the pastry crust, bake and flip over the tarte tatin with one swift maneuver.

    Grab a fork and dig into the sweet caramelized peaches with a flaky crust underneath. A scoop of vanilla ice cream adds a cool, creamy topping to the warm, softened fruit.

    You can serve your tarte tatin however you want, but French tradition insists that you serve it warm and fresh out of the skillet with a scoop of ice cream. If you wait for the dessert to cool completely, the ice cream won't melt as nicely into the pastry and won't provide the desired temperature contrast.

    Some of my other sweet peach recipes include this skillet peach cobbler and an easy peach freezer jam. I also make this iced peach green tea drink with fresh peaches that I think you'll enjoy.

    Ingredients

    Peach tarte tatin ingredients labeled.
    • brown sugar - The brown sugar combined with the butter creates a delicious caramel sauce.
    • dark rum - You can choose your favorite but here are some examples: Gosling's Black Seal Rum is known for its rich and complex flavor and is a great choice for adding depth to caramel desserts. Mount Gay Black Barrel Rum adds a slightly smoky flavor with notes of vanilla and spice. Appleton Estate Rare Blend 12 Year is a Jamaican rum that provides a complex flavor that pairs well with caramel.
    • yellow peaches - You want them to be firm-ripe--not too soft. Clingstone pits (the pits that cling to the peach flesh) tend to hold their shape better, making them better for baking. Freestone pits are easier to slice in half and remove from the pit but might not hold their shape as well in the oven. Because we are simply slicing them in half for this recipe, I'm not too worried about their shape so feel free to use either.
    • puff pastry - I use a premade sheet of frozen puff pastry and thaw it in the fridge before preparation.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Peach Tarte Tatin

    Caramel sauce simmering in cast iron pan.

    Step #1. Preheat the oven to 375°F. Add brown sugar, butter, rum, vanilla and salt to a medium (8" to 9") cast iron skillet. Cook over medium heat, stirring often, until the mixture starts to thicken and darken (about 8 minutes). Be careful not to overcook or you can burn it.

    Caramel sauce and peaches in pan.

    Step #2. Lower heat to medium-low and add the peaches (cut side down) to the skillet. Use enough peach halves to fill up the bottom of the pan in one layer. Cook until slightly softened, about 5 minutes. Take the skillet off the heat.

    Puff pastry over peaches in pan.

    Step #3. Unroll the puff pastry sheet. Cut out a circle that is about 9" in diameter or slightly wider than the width of the skillet. Place the puff pastry round on top of the peaches and tuck edges into the pan.

    Baked peach tarte tatin in cast iron skillet.

    Step #4. Bake in the preheated oven until the pastry is golden and puffed, 35-40 minutes. Remove from oven and let cool on a wire rack for 30 minutes.

    Knife loosening a peach tarte tatin in cast iron pan.

    Step #5. To invert the Tarte Tatin onto a serving dish: run a butter knife along the edge of the pastry to separate it from the skillet.

    Peach tarte tatin on golden serving tray.

    Step #6. With oven mitts, hold the serving dish on top of the skillet and carefully flip it all over. It should release with a couple of gentle shakes.

    Peach tarte tatin on golden serving tray with a slice missing.

    Step #7. Dig in! It can be served with vanilla ice cream, if desired.

    Chef's Note: This peach tarte tatin is best served when it has been cooled for about 30 minutes out of the oven; still warm but not hot.

    Flipping Tips

    Flipping over the pan is simple, but it takes a little finesse. I go into extra detail here but you can check out the video to see how it's done!

    1. First, slide a knife around the edge of the pan to separate the tarte tatin from the skillet.
    2. Put on a pair of oven mitts, in case the skillet is still hot. Then, lay the serving dish on top of the skillet.
    3. Hold the plate against the skillet and flip the pan over. Your pastry will slide out onto the dish.
    4. If it doesn't come out right away, tap on the bottom of the skillet. Check to make sure that the crust has loosened first, so the pastry doesn't fall apart.

    Peach Tarte Tatin FAQs

    What is a peach tarte tatin?

    Tarte tatin is a French upside-down sweet pastry that starts with butter and sugar at the bottom of the skillet to form a caramel sauce. Fruit is added (in this case peaches) to complete the filling, then it is topped with the crust and inverted after baking.

    How long can you store leftovers in the fridge?

    It can be refrigerated for up to 3 days in an airtight container, but be sure to reheat it in the oven for best results.

    Can you freeze it?

    Yes! It can be frozen for up to 2 months and then reheated in the oven from frozen.

    Peach tarte tatin on serving tray with golden pie server and spoons on the side.

    More Delicious Homemade Desserts to Try

    • Plum crumble with vanilla ice cream.
      Easy Plum Pie Crumble
    • Carrot cupcakes on baking rack with vegan frosting.
      Gluten Free & Vegan Carrot Cupcakes
    • Strawberry heart-shaped candies in jar.
      Strawberry Candy
    • Grapefruit cake with dried edible flowers and icing drizzle.
      Grapefruit Vanilla Cake

    If you tried this Peach Tarte Tatin Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Peach tarte tatin on marble/wooden serving board.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Peach Tarte Tatin Recipe (Video)

    This peach tarte tatin is an easy, delicious, one-pan dessert! As the peaches simmer in the butter and sugar over the stove, they absorb a delicious caramel sauce as well as release their juices, giving the sauce a hit of peach flavor.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine French
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 48 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 28 minutes minutes
    Servings 6
    Calories 358kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 8" cast iron skillet

    Ingredients

    • ⅓ cup brown sugar
    • 1 tablespoon butter
    • ¼ cup dark rum
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 4-6 yellow peaches halved, pitted and peeled
    • 1 sheet frozen puff pastry thawed
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F.
    • Add brown sugar, butter, rum, vanilla and salt to a medium (8" to 9") cast iron skillet.
      ⅓ cup brown sugar, 1 tablespoon butter, ¼ cup dark rum, 1 tablespoon vanilla extract, ¼ teaspoon salt
    • Cook over medium heat, stirring often, until the mixture starts to thicken and darken (about 8 minutes). Be careful not to overcook or you can burn it.
    • Lower heat to medium-low and add the peaches (cut side down) to the skillet. Use enough peach halves to fill up the bottom of the pan in one layer.
      4-6 yellow peaches
    • Cook until slightly softened, about 5 minutes. Take the skillet off the heat.
    • Unroll the puff pastry sheet. Cut out a circle that is about 9" in diameter or slightly wider than the width of the skillet.
    • Place the puff pastry round on top of the peaches and tuck edges into the pan.
    • Bake in the preheated oven until the pastry is golden and puffed, 35-40 minutes.
    • Remove from oven and let cool on a wire rack for 30 minutes.
    • To invert the Tarte Tatin onto a serving dish: run a butter knife along the edge of the pastry to separate it from the skillet. With oven mitts, hold the serving dish on top of the skillet and carefully flip it all over. It should release with a couple of gentle shakes.
    • Dig in! It can be served with vanilla ice cream, if desired.

    Video

    Notes

    • Serving: You can serve your tarte tatin however you want, but French tradition insists that you serve it warm and fresh out of the skillet with a scoop of ice cream. If you wait for the dessert to cool completely, the ice cream won't melt as nicely into the pastry and won't provide the desired temperature contrast.
    • Flipping over the pan is simple, but it takes a little finesse:
      • First, slide a knife around the edge of the pan to separate the tarte tatin from the skillet.
      • Put on a pair of oven mitts, in case the skillet is still hot. Then, lay the serving dish on top of the skillet.
      • Hold the plate against the skillet and flip the pan over. Your pastry will slide out onto the dish.
      • If it doesn't come out right away, tap on the bottom of the skillet. Check to make sure that the crust has loosened first, so the pastry doesn't fall apart.
    • Storage & Reheating Tips: It can be refrigerated for up to 3 days in an airtight container, but be sure to reheat it in the oven for best results. It can be frozen for up to 2 months and then reheated in the oven from frozen.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 358kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 5mg | Sodium: 203mg | Potassium: 236mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 388IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Make Corn Nuggets

    August 25, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Homemade corn nuggets are a tasty, vegetarian substitute for chicken nuggets; everything, including vegetables, tastes better when it is fried. I will show you how to make corn nuggets at home: with three variations of corn, it gives different flavors and texture, while the fried exterior gives the nuggets a good crunch.

    A woman's hand picking up fried corn nuggets on plate with dip.

    Whether you are looking for a vegetarian snack or want to eat something savory and comforting, this is the recipe for you.

    I have more sweet and savory snacks you might like, such as these chocolate glazed donut holes and tortilla cups.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What are Corn Nuggets?

    Corn nuggets are similar to corn fritters: a savory snack that originated from the south, and are sometimes used interchangeably.

    While corn fritters use corn kernels, are usually flat/round like small pancakes and fried immediately, these corn nuggets are made from corn kernels, creamed corn and cornmeal, are shaped like nuggets and then frozen before frying to keep their shape.

    Corn Nugget Ingredients

    Corn nuggets ingredients labeled on light grey background.
    • creamed corn - In a can.
    • whole kernel corn - I buy canned corn and then drain it. You can also use frozen corn that has been thawed in the frige. If you would like your corn nuggets to be a little more on the sweet side, use canned sweet corn kernels. You could even use grilled corn for some smoky flavor.
    • yellow cornmeal - Cornmeal is a type of flour made from dried corn (maize).
    • all-purpose flour - Flour will help create a crispy outer crust when fried, giving the nuggets their characteristic crunch as well as ensure that the breading stays intact during cooking.
    • milk - Can use skimmed or whole milk.
    • egg - To hold it all together.
    • canola oil - Or peanut oil, for frying.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Instructions

    Corn nugget mixture in bowl.

    Step 1: Combine the Corns. In a medium bowl, add the creamed corn, whole kernel corn, ¼ cup yellow cornmeal and chopped parsley. Mix well.

    Raw corn nuggets on baking sheet with wax paper.

    Step 2: Form & Freeze the Nuggets. Line a baking sheet with wax paper and then grease it. Drop the corn mixture by the tablespoonful onto the greased wax paper. Try not to make them too high or the inside won't cook as well. Freeze for at least 2 hours, or until firm.

    Raw corn nuggets on baking sheet with wax paper and dipped into egg mixture on spoon.

    Step 3: Prepare Breading. In a small bowl, combine the remaining 1 tablespoon of corn meal with the flour, salt and pepper. In a separate small bowl, whisk the milk and egg together.

    Raw corn nugget dipped in egg mixture on spoon.

    Step 4: Dip the Frozen Nuggets. Begin heating the canola oil in a large, deep skillet to 350°F. The oil should be about 1" deep. Dip the frozen corn nuggets into the egg-milk mixture.

    Raw corn nugget in bowl of flour.

    Step 5: Coat the Nuggets With Flour. Next, coat them with the dry flour mixture by rolling them around in it.

    Raw corn nuggets with flour coating on plate.

    Repeat with all nuggets.

    Golden corn nuggets in frying pan.

    Step 6: Fry the Corn Nuggets. Carefully place the nuggets in the hot oil (work in batches so that you don't crowd the pan and cool the oil). Fry until golden brown all over, a few minutes per side.

    Corn nuggets on paper towel.

    Step 7: Transfer to Baking Grid. Transfer to a baking grid with paper towels underneath it to catch the grease drippings. Repeat until all of the nuggets are fried.

    Fried corn nuggets on plate.

    Step 8: Cool & Serve! They will be hot inside, so let them cool for a few minutes. Serve with a dipping sauce, if desired.

    Joss' Tips

    When it comes to the best tips on how to make corn nuggets, they include the temperature of the corn nugget and timing of the coating. Keeping the nuggets frozen before breading is a must to keep the wet ingredients intact before frying. As tempting as it is to coat them in the dry flour ahead of time, they will not fry properly when the time comes.

    If you coat the nuggets and let them sit too long, the flour will absorb into the nuggets and the nuggets will lose some of their moisture. The flour also crisps up the outside of the corn nuggets and holds the filling in once fried, which is essential in this recipe. So make sure you bread the nuggets just before popping them into the hot oil.

    Serving Suggestions

    Since corn nuggets are closely related to a southern dish, it makes sense to pair this dish with other southern recipes like fried chicken, pork chops, baked beans, or barbeque ribs.

    Nuggets go well with a dipping sauce, and for these corn nuggets, you can go with honey mustard, ketchup, honey, honey dill or hot sauce for an extra spicy zing.

    Recipe FAQs

    What are corn nuggets made from?

    Corn nuggets are made from 3 different types of corn including creamed corn, corn kernels and cornmeal.

    How do you store leftover nuggets?

    The corn nuggets can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 to 5 days.

    How do you reheat corn nuggets?

    Corn nuggets can be reheated in the oven at 350°F on a baking sheet until heated through. You can also microwave them but they won't be crispy.

    Fried corn nuggets on plate with dip and a woman's hand holding a nugget.

    Related Vegetarian Snacks to Consider

    • Cinnamon apple chips in a bowl.
      Cinnamon Apple Chips
    • Vegetarian zucchini crab cakes stacked with a dollop of tartar sauce.
      Vegetarian Zucchini 'Crab' Cakes
    • Crispy kale chips in dish on wooden background.
      How to Make Crispy Kale Chips
    • Grilled bread on outdoor grill with tongs.
      How to Grill Bread

    If you tried this 📋 recipe tutorial for 🌽 How to Make Corn Nuggets or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Corn nuggets on plate with dip.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    How to Make Corn Nuggets

    Homemade corn nuggets are a tasty, vegetarian substitute for chicken nuggets or a delicious, savory snack. I will show you how to make corn nuggets at home: using three variations of corn.
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 6 minutes minutes
    Chill Hours 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 26 minutes minutes
    Servings 16 corn nuggets
    Calories 82kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Large frying pan
    • Spider strainer

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup creamed corn
    • 1 cup canned whole kernel corn drained
    • ¼ cup yellow cornmeal + 1 tablespoon for the flour mixture
    • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
    • ½ cup all-purpose flour
    • ½ teaspoon salt or to taste
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper
    • ¼ cup milk
    • 1 egg
    • 3 cups canola oil approximately--for frying
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, add the creamed corn, whole kernel corn, ¼ cup yellow cornmeal and chopped parsley. Mix well.
      Corn nugget mixture in bowl.
    • Line a baking sheet with wax paper and then grease it. Drop the corn mixture by the tablespoonful onto the greased wax paper. Try not to make them too high or the inside won't cook as well. Freeze for at least 2 hours, or until firm.
      Raw corn nuggets on baking sheet with wax paper.
    • In a small bowl, combine the remaining 1 tablespoon of corn meal with the flour, salt and pepper. In a separate small bowl, whisk the milk and egg together.
      Raw corn nuggets on baking sheet with wax paper and dipped into egg mixture on spoon.
    • Begin heating the canola oil in a large, deep skillet to 350°F. The oil should be about 1" deep. Dip the frozen corn nuggets into the egg-milk mixture. Then, coat with the dry flour mixture.
      Raw corn nugget in bowl of flour.
    • Carefully place the nuggets in the hot oil (work in batches so that you don't crowd the pan and cool the oil). Fry until golden brown all over, a few minutes per side.
      Raw corn nuggets in hot oil in frying pan.
    • Transfer to a baking grid with paper towels underneath it to catch the grease drippings. Repeat until all of the nuggets are fried.
      Corn nuggets on paper towel.
    • They will be hot inside, so let them cool for a few minutes. Serve with a dipping sauce, if desired.
      Fried corn nuggets on plate with dip and a woman's hand.

    Notes

    • Storage: The corn nuggets can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 to 5 days.
    • Reheating: They can be reheated in the oven at 350°F on a baking sheet until heated through. You can also microwave them but they won't be crispy.
    • Note about freezing the nuggets: Keeping the nuggets frozen before breading is a must to keep the wet ingredients intact before frying.
    • After breading, work quickly. If you coat the nuggets and let them sit too long, the flour will absorb into the nuggets and the nuggets will lose some of their moisture. The flour also crisps up the outside of the corn nuggets and holds the filling in once fried, which is essential in this recipe. So make sure you bread the nuggets just before popping them into the hot oil.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 82kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 11mg | Sodium: 128mg | Potassium: 70mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 267IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 1mg

    Toasted Marshmallow Pumpkin Latte

    August 21, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Everyone knows that fall is pumpkin spice season. And for this, I've created a special drink to liven up the classic PSL. This toasted marshmallow pumpkin latte takes the classic pumpkin spice latte, then dresses it up with a dollop of marshmallow fluff. The toasted fluff mingles with the hot espresso and pumpkin spice to create a creamy autumn beverage.

    Marshmallow pumpkin latte in a mug, coffee grind on the side.

    PSL With a Twist

    Ditch your regular morning cup of Joe and make yourself a hot marshmallow latte before you take a walk in the park, or treat your friends during your annual Halloween party. Once you gather the ingredients, it takes only 5 minutes to brew.

    Toasting the marshmallow fluff adds a cozy, autumn-inspired flavor to your latte, reminiscent of marshmallows roasted over a crackling campfire on a crisp fall evening.

    This homemade gingerbread latte and caramel brûlée latte are more of my favorites for when the weather starts to cool.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Toasted marshmallow pumpkin spice latte ingredients labeled.
    • marshmallow fluff - Marshmallow fluff is a simple spread made from egg whites, corn syrup, sugar and vanillin. These ingredients create a sweet, sticky spread that tastes just like marshmallows. It also comes in strawberry flavor. You can buy marshmallow fluff from your local grocery store or online.
    • canned pure pumpkin purée - I like to use a small amount. To enhance the authentic pumpkin flavor, you can add a little more purée or pumpkin pie filling and use up any pumpkin pie filling leftovers you have on hand. Just go easy on the purée, as adding too much can make your beverage a little too thick and unpleasant.
    • sugar - White or brown sugar work well. Brown sugar will give richer flavor than white.
    • prepared hot espresso - Or strong-brewed coffee.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: Another option, instead of using the sugar and pumpkin pie spices, is using a pumpkin spice latte syrup.

    How to Make a Marshmallow Pumpkin Latte

    Pumpkin pie spice in a measuring spoon over a small bowl of coffee grind.

    Step 1: Prepare Espresso. Prepare the espresso in your espresso maker (or strong-brewed coffee in your drip coffee maker) and set aside.

    Milk, pumpkin pie spice and purée in a saucepan.

    Step 2: Add Ingredients to Saucepan. In a small saucepan, add the milk, pumpkin purée, pumpkin pie spice and sugar.

    Milk, pumpkin pie spice and purée in a saucepan with a whisk.

    Step 3: Whisk Over Medium Heat. Heat over medium heat until hot, whisking frequently. Do not let it come to a boil. Remove from heat.

    Coffee in a mug with vanilla.

    Step 4: Add Espresso. Pour the freshly brewed espresso or strong coffee into a mug. Add the vanilla extract.

    Coffee in a mug with a pumpkin milk mixture.

    Step 5: Add Milk Mixture. Add the pumpkin-milk mixture and stir to combine.

    Marshmallow fluff on a spoon and a mug of pumpkin spice latte.

    Step 6: Top With Marshmallow Fluff. Spoon the marshmallow fluff on top of the drink.

    Marshmallow pumpkin latte in a clear glass mug with a kitchen torch.

    Step 7: Toast the Marshmallow Fluff. Toast the marshmallow fluff lightly with a kitchen torch.

    Chef's Note: Toasting the marshmallow fluff is optional but I highly recommend it, to give it that yummy roasted marshmallow flavor!

    Marshmallow pumpkin latte in a mug, coffee grind on the side and white flowers in the background.

    Step 8: Serve! Sprinkle with a little more pumpkin pie spice. Serve the toasted marshmallow latte immediately!

    Joss' Top Tip

    If you are using a drip coffee maker to brew strong coffee instead of espresso: you can add 1 teaspoon of pumpkin pie spice to the coffee filter along with the coffee grind before brewing, for extra pumpkin spice flavor! (Do not add spices to the grind if using an espresso machine.)

    Step it Up a Notch

    If you're feeling up to it, try roasting your own coffee beans for this latte! If you don't have a roaster yet, check out my home coffee roaster reviews.

    Serve it with a pumpkin bread, pumpkin spice cake pops or biscotti for dipping.

    When you're done, consider topping the marshmallow fluff with sprinkles, more pumpkin spice or a drizzle of caramel coffee syrup.

    Toasted marshmallow pumpkin latte in a mug with a small amount of pumpkin purée topping.

    ❤️ More Pumpkin Recipes You Will Love

    • Pumpkin galette sliced into quarters on wooden plate.
      Pumpkin Galette
    • Pumpkin pie dessert hummus in black bowl with sweet biscuits on the side.
      Pumpkin Pie Dessert Hummus
    • Pumpkin seed milk in glass with pumpkin seeds on the side.
      Pumpkin Seed Milk
    • Pumpkin martinis.
      Pumpkin Pie Spice Martini

    Happy 🍁🎃🍂 pumpkin spice season! What did you think of this twist on the pumpkin spice latte? If you tried this Toasted Marshmallow Pumpkin Latte Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Toasted marshmallow pumpkin spice latte in coffee mug.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Toasted Marshmallow Pumpkin Latte

    This toasted marshmallow pumpkin latte takes the classic PSL, then dresses it up with a dollop of toasted marshmallow fluff! Toasting it adds a cozy, autumn-inspired flavor to your latte, reminiscent of marshmallows roasted over a crackling campfire on a crisp fall evening.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 1
    Calories 295kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Kitchen torch
    • Coffee Mug

    Ingredients

    • ¾ cup milk
    • 1 tablespoon pure pumpkin purée
    • ¼ teaspoon pumpkin pie spice
    • 1 tablespoon sugar or to taste
    • ¼ cup hot espresso or strong-brewed coffee
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ cup marshmallow fluff
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Prepare the espresso (or strong coffee) and set aside.
      ¼ cup hot espresso
      Pumpkin pie spice in a measuring spoon over a small bowl of coffee grind.
    • In a small saucepan, add the milk, pumpkin purée, pumpkin pie spice and sugar.
      ¾ cup milk, 1 tablespoon pure pumpkin purée, ¼ teaspoon pumpkin pie spice, 1 tablespoon sugar
      Milk pouring into a saucepan.
    • Heat over medium heat until hot, whisking frequently. Do not let it come to a boil. Remove from heat.
      Milk, pumpkin pie spice and puree in a saucepan with a whisk.
    • Pour the freshly brewed espresso or strong coffee into a mug. Add the vanilla. Add the pumpkin-milk mixture and stir to combine.
      1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      Coffee in a mug with vanilla.
    • Spoon the marshmallow fluff on top. Toast the marshmallow fluff lightly with a kitchen torch.
      ¼ cup marshmallow fluff
      Marshmallow fluff on a spoon and a mug of pumpkin spice latte.
    • Sprinkle with a little more pumpkin pie spice. Serve immediately!
      Marshmallow pumpkin latte in a mug, coffee grind on the side.

    Notes

    • Drip coffee maker option: If using a drip coffee maker to brew strong coffee: you can add 1 teaspoon of pumpkin pie spice to the coffee filter along with the coffee grind before brewing, for extra flavor. (Do not add spices to the grind if using an espresso machine.)
    • Pumpkin amount: You can add more pumpkin spice and/or pumpkin purée to the mixture if you like, but the purée starts to thicken the texture of the drink and that can be unpleasant to some.
    • Toasting is Optional: Toasting the marshmallow fluff is optional but I highly recommend it, to give it that yummy roasted marshmallow flavor!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 295kcal | Carbohydrates: 54g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 18mg | Sodium: 89mg | Potassium: 356mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 45g | Vitamin A: 2600IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 221mg | Iron: 1mg

    Raspberry Galette

    August 18, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    This raspberry galette features buttery, flaky crust surrounding a sweet-tart raspberry filling to create a luscious pastry inspired by a classic French recipe. The best part about this galette recipe is that the crust doesn't have to be perfect--in fact, the imperfections give it even more character.

    Raspberry galette on marble and wooden cutting board with metal pie server and dessert spoons.

    There are a number of galette flavors out there including both sweet and savory options like this blackberry galette and pumpkin galette.

    This particular galette is similar to a pie in that it features a piping hot fruit filling surrounded by a buttery crust. However, the flat and free-form nature of this dessert is what sets it apart.

    This makes it easier to prepare than a pie because you don't have the hassle of a top crust. It's also easier to slice into: simply use a pizza cutter on a cutting board.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    • flour - use all-purpose flour
    • salt - because we are using unsalted butter we can control the salt levels
    • granulated sugar - enhances the sweetness of the berries as well as keeps baked goods moist and tender
    • butter - use cold unsalted butter and cut into cubes
    • water - make sure to use cold water
    • fresh or frozen raspberries - if using frozen, there is no need to thaw them
    • cornstarch - to thicken up the fruit juices that are released during baking

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    1. Make the pastry. Combine the flour, sugar, and salt in a large bowl. Add the butter and work with your fingers until it looks like coarse crumbs. Add 3 tablespoons of cold water into the mixture and continue mixing it in. Work the dough into a ball (you may need to add another tablespoon of cold water to get the desired consistency).
    2. Chill the dough. Flatten the dough ball into a disk and wrap it up tightly in a large piece of parchment paper (the parchment paper should be the length of your baking pan). Refrigerate for 30 minutes.
    3. Make filling. Preheat oven to 400°F. Take the dough out of the fridge and let sit for about 5 minutes before rolling out, to help prevent cracks. In a medium bowl, combine the raspberries with the sugar, cornstarch and salt.
    4. Roll the dough. Roll the dough out on a lightly floured surface or directly on the parchment into a large circle, about 12"-14" in diameter (⅛" thickness is ideal). It doesn't have to look perfect! The more rustic, the better. Carefully transfer the parchment with the dough onto a rimmed baking sheet or pizza pan.
    5. Add filling. Spoon the fruit filling into the center of the circle, leaving a 2" to 3" border of dough around the filling. Fold the dough border over the fruit, overlapping a little as you go (remember not to worry about perfection here). The center will remain open.
    6. Bake. Bake for 35-45 minutes in the preheated oven, until the pastry is golden and fruit is bubbling.
    7. Cool. Transfer to a wire rack and let cool before serving.
    Piece of raspberry galette on plate with spoon.

    👩🏻‍🍳Chef's Note: You know the galette is ready when the crust has browned and the fruit is bubbling. As tempting as it might be, don't eat the galette immediately after you pull it out of the oven--the bubbling fruit could burn your mouth. Let it cool before you take a bite.

    Serving Suggestions

    Raspberry galette is best served when it's freshly cooled to room temperature or slightly warm. Once it has had time to rest, the filling is set and ready for slicing. However, galette can be just as sweet and delicious if you prefer a cold pastry chilled in the fridge.

    Serve it after a meal of bison ribeye steaks or carne asada. Accompany the galette with champagne, cider or anything bubbly.

    To add a cold, sweet creaminess to your galette, add a scoop of vanilla ice cream or creamy, homemade whipped topping right when you slice it and serve it to your guests.

    Expert Tips

    • Chilled ingredients: Make sure the butter and water are cold when making the pastry dough. This will help the dough keep its shape.
    • Cleaner edges: To get a cleaner cut circle, simply trim around the edges of the dough after rolling it out.
    • Rimmed pan: Make sure to use a rimmed baking pan to catch any drippings that might occur during baking.

    Storage and Reheating Tips

    • Make-ahead option: If you're planning ahead, you can pre-make the egg-free dough and freeze it (in plastic wrap and a freezer bag) for up to three months, or grab some ready-made pastry dough from the supermarket.
    • Storage: Cover and store the cooled, baked galette at room temperature for up to 1 to 2 days, in the fridge for up to 5 days or in the freezer for up to 2 to 3 months.
    • Reheating: Reheat the galette in a preheated 350°F oven until warmed through. It can also be reheated in the oven from frozen.
    • Freezing before baking option: You can also freeze an unbaked galette by freezing it on a baking sheet first and then transferring it to a freezer bag. Bake it straight from frozen in a preheated 400°F oven.

    My Galette Leaked - Now What?

    It is pretty common for a fruit galette to leak while baking as it is free-form and filled with fruit that release a lot of liquid. This is why a rimmed baking pan should be used; it will catch any liquid that leaks. Some other tips to avoid this include:

    • Pay attention to the pastry when folding it over the filling. Make sure there aren't any open cracks down the sides.
    • Don't overfill the pastry.
    • Don't skip the cornstarch as this will thicken the fruit mixture as it bakes.

    If it does happen, don't fret about it. This dessert is meant to be rustic and imperfect. Once cooled, the fruit juices that have leaked will set and can be easily removed. The parchment and rimmed pan make this easy to clean up.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you keep the bottom of galette from getting soggy?

    To stop the fruit juice from making the crust soggy, you can brush the galette crust with egg white or add a layer of crumbled cookies or semolina flour on the bottom before the filling is added.

    Is galette made from puff pastry?

    You can make a galette with puff pastry or a homemade pastry dough.

    Raspberry galette on marble and wooden cutting board with small spoons.

    More Raspberry Recipes You Will Love

    • Fruit infused water with berries in glass pitcher.
      How to Make Fruit-Infused Water
    • Raspberry twist cocktail in champagne glasses with lemon twist.
      Raspberry Twist Cocktail
    • Raspberry Coulis Crème Brûlée in a ramekin.
      Raspberry Crème Brûlée
    • Canada Day raspberry cheesecake in jars with red and white spoons.
      Raspberry Cheesecake in a Jar (Canada Day Dessert)

    If you tried this Raspberry Galette Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Raspberry galette on marble and wooden cutting board.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Raspberry Galette

    This homemade raspberry galette consists of buttery, flaky crust surrounding a sweet-tart raspberry filling to create a luscious pastry inspired by a classic French recipe.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine French
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 280kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Rolling pin
    • Rimmed pizza pan

    Ingredients

    For the Pastry:

    • 1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 3 tablespoons sugar
    • ½ cup cold unsalted butter cut into cubes
    • 3 tablespoons cold water

    For the Filling:

    • 3 cups fresh or frozen raspberries if using frozen, do not thaw them
    • ½ cup sugar
    • 2 tablespoons corn starch
    • 1 pinch salt
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Combine the flour, sugar, and salt in a large bowl.
    • Add the butter and work with your fingers until it looks like coarse crumbs.
    • Add 3 tablespoons of cold water into the mixture and continue mixing it in. Work the dough into a ball (you may need to add another tablespoon of cold water to get the desired consistency).
    • Flatten the dough ball into a disk and wrap it up tightly in a large piece of parchment paper (the parchment paper should be the length of your baking pan). Refrigerate for 30 minutes.
    • Preheat oven to 400°F. Take the dough out of the fridge and let sit for about 5 minutes before rolling out, to help prevent cracks.
    • In a medium bowl, combine the raspberries with the sugar, cornstarch and salt.
    • Roll the dough out on a lightly floured surface or directly on the parchment into a large circle, about 12"-14" in diameter (⅛" thickness is ideal). It doesn't have to look perfect! The more rustic, the better. Carefully transfer the parchment with the dough onto a rimmed baking sheet or pizza pan.
    • Spoon the fruit filling into the center of the circle, leaving a 2" to 3" border of dough around the filling.
    • Fold the dough border over the fruit, overlapping a little as you go (remember not to worry about perfection here). The center will remain open.
    • Bake for 35-45 minutes in the preheated oven, until the pastry is golden and fruit is bubbling.
    • Transfer to a wire rack and let cool before serving.

    Notes

    • Rimmed pan: Make sure to use a rimmed baking pan to catch any drippings that might occur during baking.
    • Cleaner edges: To get a cleaner cut circle, simply trim around the edges of the dough after rolling it out.
    • Chilled ingredients: Make sure the butter and water are cold when making the pastry dough. This will help the dough keep its shape.
    • Make-ahead option: If you're planning ahead, you can pre-make the egg-free dough and freeze it (in plastic wrap and a freezer bag) for up to three months, or grab some ready-made pastry dough from the supermarket.
    • Storage: Cover and store the cooled, baked galette at room temperature for up to 1 to 2 days, in the fridge for up to 5 days or in the freezer for up to 2 to 3 months.
    • Reheating: Reheat the galette in a preheated 350°F oven until heated through. It can also be reheated in the oven from frozen.
    • Freezing before baking option: You can also freeze an unbaked galette by freezing it on a baking sheet first and then transferring it to a freezer bag. Bake it straight from frozen in a preheated 400°F oven.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 280kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 31mg | Sodium: 167mg | Potassium: 93mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 369IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Roast Coffee Beans

    August 15, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 36 Comments

    Have you ever been curious about how to roast coffee beans at home? It all starts with some green coffee beans and a roaster and you're on your way to a delicious, freshly roasted cup of coffee! It's a simple and satisfying process that I will guide you through step-by-step.

    Green and brown coffee beans on wooden serving board, coffee mug on the side.

    Some people do use popcorn makers, ovens and frying pans to roast coffee beans at home, but personally I recommend using a coffee roaster. You can check out some of the best home coffee roasters here.

    Popcorn makers are not designed for roasting coffee, and I believe using a purpose-built coffee roaster is the best way to get a fresh cup of joe.

    Why?

    1. It allows you to roast outside, avoiding smoke and smell inside of your home.
    2. It stirs the beans for you continuously and it is much easier to get an even roast on your beans.
    3. The motor can handle it. I used to use a popcorn maker for roasting, but the motor burned out very quickly! Plus, it could void the warranty if you use it in that way.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    How Long Does it Take to Roast Coffee Beans?

    The time it takes to roast coffee beans with a home coffee roaster can vary greatly depending on your specific model, the temperature you use, how many beans you use in one go and how dark you like your beans. It generally takes me between 26 and 50 minutes for light to dark roast.

    At that point you will need to cool and then off-gas the beans for 1-3 days, depending on your preference.

    What You Will Need

    Coffee roaster and a bag of green coffee beans.

    For this tutorial, you will need green coffee beans and a coffee roaster.

    Instructions

    Chef's Note: To begin, the best place to set up your coffee roaster is outside if you can. The smell from roasting is very strong.

    Coffee roaster with raw green coffee beans.

    Step 1: Prepare the coffee roaster. Add the raw green coffee beans to the coffee roaster, with the amount specified in the manual.

    Coffee roaster with raw green coffee beans and a lid on.

    Step 2: Cover & heat. Cover with the lid and turn the temperature dial to 140°C (285°F) to begin the roasting process.

    Coffee roaster with coffee beans inside and the lid steaming up. Flower pot in the background.

    Step 3: Roast until beans turn yellow. Roast the beans until they turn from green to yellow and smell grassy. This took about 14 minutes in my roaster. Water will start evaporating from the beans and the lid of the roaster will steam up.

    Coffee roaster with coffee beans. A purple plate of green coffee beans on the side.

    Step 4: Turn up the heat for first crack. Turn the temperature dial to 180°C (355°F). Continue roasting until you hear a cracking noise, about 12 minutes (this is the sound of sugars inside the beans caramelizing). You will start to see chaff (the skin of the beans) in the roaster.

    Coffee roaster with coffee beans roasting in it.

    Chef's Note: After the first crack, this is the point at which your coffee beans are officially lightly roasted and suitable to make a very light coffee with, but I recommend roasting it further.

    Coffee roaster with light golden-brown coffee beans and lid on.

    Step 5. Continue roasting. Turn the temperature dial to 220°C (430°F). Watch the beans for the change in color.

    • Light Roast: My beans became a nice light roast after about 7 minutes at this temperature (after the first crack).
    • Medium Roast: If you want a medium roast, keep roasting until you hear the beans cracking again (the second crack) and have reached medium brown in color. This took about 10 minutes in my roaster.
    • Dark Roast: For a dark roast, the beans will be dark and oily looking. This took about 24 minutes.

    Chef's Note: Times may vary with your roaster. Always look for color and listen for the first and second crack.

    Coffee roaster with brown coffee beans. A purple plate of green coffee beans on the side.

    Medium Roast

    Open coffee roaster with dark coffee beans.

    Dark Roast

    Open coffee roaster with dark coffee beans inside.
    Coffee beans in metal colander.

    Step 6: Cool Beans. When the beans are finished roasting, they need to cool quickly to stop cooking. Carefully transfer them from the roaster to a metal colander. Shake them in the colander until they are easy to handle.

    If you have 2 metal colanders, you can move them back and forth between the 2 colanders. This will cool them down and help remove the chaff (the skin of the beans). Remove as much chaff as you can.

    Coffee beans cooling in metal colander.
    Coffee beans in metal colander held by hand.

    Expert tip from Damian Reed at Everything Coffee Biz in Panama: "...move them around preferably in front of a fan or on a windy day. I shake it in the colander, letting the chaff come to the top, then blow it off. LET IT COOL until it is easy to touch."

    Roasted coffee beans.

    Step 7: Off gas. Once they have been cooled, leave the beans out for 1-3 days, as they will off-gas carbon dioxide. Then, store in an air-tight container in a cool, dark place like your pantry.

    Green and brown coffee beans on wooden serving board.

    Step 8: Grind & brew. Your beans have now reached full-flavor. They are ready for grinding and brewing. Brew the beans within 7 days for maximum freshness.

    🍫 What else can you do with roasted coffee beans besides grind and brew them? Try making chocolate covered coffee beans!

    4 different roasts of coffee beans on wooden serving board.

    Coffee Roasting Tips

    • These are average roasting times that worked in my roaster. It may vary with your own appliance. Remember to watch for the beans to change color and listen for the first and second crack.
    • Practice makes perfect! Knowing the proper times for your roaster will come with practice and it will become much easier to achieve your favorite roast over time.
    • Ever wonder how they make flavored coffee beans? If you want to add flavor to your beans, add a bit of flavor oil when they are still warm (just after cooling them in the metal colander). Mix them around with a wooden spoon to coat them evenly. Read flavor oil instructions for amounts.
    • The best roast for espresso is between medium and medium-dark.
    • Best beans for espresso roast: Give robusta coffee beans a try. They are often used for espresso because they produce a better crema from the high density of oils; they also have more caffeine.
    • Arabica beans: Coffee from arabica beans will be more full-bodied/thicker as they are grown at higher altitudes, so keep that in mind when searching for green beans.
    • Containers with one-way CO2 valves: This valve helps to release carbon dioxide while minimizing oxidation. You can place the roasted beans in the container after they have cooled, in a cool place, and then wait a few days before brewing.
    Green and brown coffee beans on wooden serving board, coffee mug in the background.

    More Coffee Recipes You Will Love

    • Gingerbread latte and gingerbread coffee syrup.
      Gingerbread Coffee Syrup (+ Latte)
    • Irish coffee in coffee mug with 4 leaf clover, whipped cream and chocolate curls.
      Irish Coffee Cocktail
    • Pumpkin spice coffee creamer pouring into glass mug of coffee.
      Homemade Pumpkin Spice Coffee Creamer
    • Toasted marshmallow pumpkin spice latte in coffee mug.
      Toasted Marshmallow Pumpkin Latte

    How did you like roasting your own coffee beans? What is your favorite roast? Mine is medium but every now and then I enjoy dark as well!

    If you tried this recipe tutorial for ☕ How to Roast Coffee Beans or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    4 colors of coffee beans on wooden board with a mug of coffee on the side.
    Print Pin
    5 from 13 votes

    How to Roast Coffee Beans

    This is a detailed tutorial on how to roast coffee beans at home. It all starts with some green coffee beans and a roaster and you're on your way to a delicious, freshly roasted cup of coffee!
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American, Ethiopian, Panamanian
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 1
    Calories 520kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Coffee Roaster
    • Metal Colander
    • Coffee Container (Optional)

    Ingredients

    • ½ pound green coffee beans use as much as your coffee roaster holds - check manual
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • To begin, the best place to set up your coffee roaster is outside if you can. The smell from roasting is very strong.
      Coffee roaster and a bag of green coffee beans.
    • Add the raw coffee beans to the coffee roaster, with the amount specified in the manual.
      Coffee roaster with raw green coffee beans.
    • Cover with the lid and turn the temperature dial to 140°C (285°F) to begin the roasting process.
      Coffee roaster with raw green coffee beans and a lid on.
    • Roast the beans until they turn from green to yellow and smell grassy. This took about 14 minutes in our roaster. Water will start evaporating from the beans and the lid of the roaster will steam up.
      Coffee roaster with coffee beans. A purple plate of green coffee beans on the side.
    • Turn the temperature dial to 180°C (355°F). Continue roasting until you hear a cracking noise, about 12 minutes (this is the sound of sugars inside the beans caramelizing). You will start to see chaff (the skin of the beans) in the roaster. This is the point at which your coffee beans are officially lightly roasted and suitable to make a very light coffee with, but it is recommended to roast further.
      Coffee roaster with coffee beans. A purple plate of green coffee beans on the side.
    • Turn the temperature dial to 220°C (430°F). Watch the beans for the change in color. Our beans became a nice light roast after about 7 minutes at this temperature. If you want a medium roast, keep roasting until you hear the beans cracking again and have reached medium brown in color. This took about 10 minutes in our roaster. For a dark roast, the beans will be dark and oily looking. This took about 24 minutes. (Times may vary with your roaster. Always look for color and listen for cracking.)
      Open coffee roaster with dark coffee beans.
    • When the beans are finished roasting, they need to cool quickly to stop cooking. Carefully transfer them from the roaster to a metal colander. Shake them in the colander until they are warm to the touch. If you have 2 metal colanders, you can move them back and forth between the 2 colanders. This will cool them down and help remove the chaff (the skin of the beans). Remove as much chaff as you can (it easily blows away).
      Coffee beans in metal colander.
    • Once they have been cooled, leave the beans out for 1-3 days, as they will off-gas carbon dioxide. Then, store in an air-tight container in a cool, dark place like your pantry.
      Coffee beans in metal bowl.
    • Your beans have now reached full-flavor. They are ready for grinding and brewing. Brew the beans within 7 days for maximum freshness.
      Green and brown coffee beans on wooden serving board.

    Notes

    • The nutrition information is estimated for 100 grams of roasted coffee beans; not for brewed coffee.
    • These are average roasting times that worked in our roaster. It may vary with your own appliance. Remember to watch for the beans to change color and listen for the first and second crack.
    • Practice makes perfect! Knowing the proper times for your roaster will come with practice and it will become much easier to achieve your favorite roast over time.
    • If you want to add flavor to your coffee beans, add a bit of flavor oil when they are still warm (just after cooling them in the metal colander). Mix them around with a wooden spoon to coat them evenly. Read flavor oil instructions for amounts.
    • The best roast for espresso is between medium and medium-dark.
    • Best beans for espresso roast: Give robusta coffee beans a try. They are often used for espresso because they produce a better crema from the high density of oils; they also have more caffeine.
    • Arabica beans: Coffee from arabica beans will be more full-bodied/thicker as they are grown at higher altitudes, so keep that in mind when searching for green beans.
    • Containers with one-way CO2 valves: This valve helps to release carbon dioxide while minimizing oxidation. You can place the roasted beans in the container after they have cooled, in a cool place, and then wait a few days before brewing.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 100g | Calories: 520kcal | Carbohydrates: 62g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 150mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 52g | Calcium: 160mg | Iron: 5.4mg

    Carne Asada Nachos

    August 11, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    These carne asada nachos are the perfect, hearty appetizer, snack or main dish with complex flavors and textures in the spices, meat and toppings. They're served with a delicious, creamy cilantro dip. Here are some tips and information on how to make and enjoy these simple but flavorful nachos.

    Carne asada nachos on sheet pan with an avocado, dip and jalapeños on the side.

    It is made an easy recipe by simply adding leftover grilled meat, grated cheese and a jalapeño on top of tortilla chips, and adding some cool toppings after baking: fresh tomatoes, creamy avocado, an amazing cilantro dip and lime wedges for an extra punch. The nachos would also taste amazing topped with my tomatillo hot sauce.

    If you're not a fan of cilantro, you can make guacamole dip instead. Speaking of grilled meat, my bison steak and pork skewers are meaty BBQ favorites.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Carne Asada Nachos Ingredients

    Carne asada nachos ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • tortilla chips - If you prefer, use multi-grain tortilla chips. The seeds add more flavor, and they are a little sturdier, making them perfect for carrying loads of toppings.
    • Monterey Jack cheese - Monterey Jack melts very well so it's ideal for nachos. It's also known for its mild flavor which complements the meat and dip well. You can switch it up if you like and use cheddar or a Mexican cheese mixture.
    • Carne Asada - Carne asada is commonly made with flank or skirt steak and is either marinated or seasoned with a spice rub and then grilled and thinly sliced. You can either use leftovers for this recipe or check out how to make carne asada here.
    • jalapeño - I love a lot of spice but you can leave these out if you're not a fan.
    • mayo - This is for the dip.
    • fresh cilantro - The cilantro dip is perfect for these nachos, but you can adjust the amount of cilantro if you like. If you're not a fan, serve the nachos without it or choose another dip/sauce like the classic sour cream and salsa.
    • tomatoes - Roma tomatoes are great for nachos because they aren't very watery and have a concentrated flavor.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make This Dish

    Tortilla chips on sheet pan.

    Step 1. Preheat. Preheat oven to 400˚F. Grease a rimmed baking sheet. Spread half of the tortilla chips on the baking sheet.

    Tortilla chips with shredded cheese on sheet pan.

    Step 2. Add Toppings. Top with half of the Monterey Jack cheese, half of the carne asada, and half of the jalapeño slices.

    Carne asada nachos assembled on sheet pan.

    Step 3. Repeat. Repeat with remaining tortilla chips, cheese, carne asada and jalapeños.

    Carne asada nachos baked on sheet pan.

    Step 4. Bake. Bake in the preheated oven for about 10 minutes, until the cheese has melted.

    Cilantro dip blended in food processor.

    Step 5. Make the Dip. Meanwhile, add all of the cilantro dip ingredients to a blender. Blend until smooth.

    Creamy cilantro dip in jar.

    Step 6. Reserve. Transfer to a serving dish and reserve.

    Carne asada nachos in sheet pan with fresh toppings.

    Step 7. Add Fresh Toppings. Top the nachos with the diced tomatoes, avocado and freshly chopped cilantro.

    Carne asada nachos in sheet pan with condiments on the side.

    Step 8. Serve. Serve with the cilantro dip and lime wedges.

    Carne asada nachos with creamy cilantro drizzle on baking sheet.

    Chef's Note: You can either serve the dip on the side if you have some diners who don't like cilantro or drizzle it over the nachos if everybody's into it.

    Top Tip

    If you prefer your cheese to have a crispy top, you can set your oven to broil after baking. Put your nachos under the broiler for a minute or two. It will make the cheese extra golden and crunchy on top. It will also add more texture to your nachos in each bite.

    Serving Suggestions

    With all of the saltiness going on in the carne asada nachos, it is good to have a drink to wash that down. Besides serving your guests tall glasses of water, you might want to provide the adults with an alcoholic option:

    • A classic margarita or white wine sangria as a refreshment to match the Mexican/Spanish theme.
    • If you are looking for a fruity flavor, a Malbec wine will pair well with the steak and spices.
    • For beer lovers, a pale ale will complement the smokiness of the meat.

    Recipe FAQs

    What cut of meat is used for carne asada nachos and tacos?

    Carne asada is commonly made with flank or skirt steak, both of which take well to a marinade.

    How much carne asada per person for nachos?

    These nachos can serve about 8 people per pan as an appetizer. This works out to 1 cup of tortilla chips and a ¼ cup serving of sliced meat per person.

    How long do leftovers last?

    Cover the leftovers well and store them in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    How do you reheat the leftovers?

    Reheat them on a sheet pan in a 300°F oven for about 5 to 10 minutes or until heated to your liking. Hold off on the fresh toppings until after heating.

    Carne asada nachos on a plate with cilantro dip.

    More Meaty Appetizers to Try

    • Baked taco cups in white dish with lentils on decorative cloth.
      Mini Taco Cups
    • Melon prosciutto skewers with toothpicks.
      Melon Prosciutto Skewers (Summer Appetizer)
    • Bison meatballs with BBQ sauce and parsley.
      Bison Meatballs
    • 4th of July pulled pork sliders on parchment lined serving tray.
      4th of July Pulled Pork Sliders

    If you tried this Carne Asada Nachos Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Carne asada nachos with cilantro dip drizzled on top.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Carne Asada Nachos

    These carne asada nachos are the perfect, hearty appetizer, snack or main dish with complex flavors and textures in the spices, meat and toppings. They're served with a delicious, creamy cilantro dip.
    Course Appetizer, Main Course, Snack
    Cuisine American, Latin American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 949kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Sheet pan
    • Blender

    Ingredients

    For the Nachos

    • 8 cups tortilla chips
    • 5 cups Monterey Jack cheese grated
    • 2 cups Carne Asada leftover--sliced into small pieces
    • 1 jalapeño thinly sliced

    For the Cilantro Dip

    • ¼ cup mayo
    • ½ cup fresh cilantro chopped
    • ¼ cup white onion chopped
    • 1 garlic clove chopped

    To Serve

    • ½ cup tomatoes diced
    • 1 avocado diced
    • fresh cilantro leaves chopped
    • lime wedges
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 400˚F. Grease a rimmed baking sheet. Spread half of the tortilla chips on the baking sheet.
    • Top with half of the Monterey Jack cheese, half of the carne asada, and half of the jalapeño slices.
    • Repeat with remaining tortilla chips, cheese, carne asada and jalapeños.
    • Bake in the preheated oven for about 10 minutes, until the cheese has melted.
    • Meanwhile, add all of the cilantro dip ingredients to a blender. Blend until smooth.
    • Top the nachos with the diced tomatoes, avocado and freshly chopped cilantro. Serve with the cilantro dip and lime wedges.

    Notes

    • If you prefer your cheese to have a crispy top, you can set your oven to broil after baking. Put your nachos under the broiler for a minute or two. It will make the cheese extra golden and crunchy on top.
    • The cilantro dip is perfect for these nachos, but you can adjust the amount of cilantro if you like.
    • For drink pairings, a classic margarita or sangria match the Mexican theme. If you are looking for a fruity flavor, a Malbec wine will pair well with the steak and spices. For beer lovers, a pale ale will complement the smokiness of the meat.
    • Cover the leftovers well and store them in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Reheat them on a sheet pan in a 300°F oven for about 5 to 10 minutes or until heated to your liking. Hold off on the fresh toppings until after heating.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 949kcal | Carbohydrates: 78g | Protein: 40g | Fat: 55g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 14g | Monounsaturated Fat: 18g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 98mg | Sodium: 896mg | Potassium: 654mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 680IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 744mg | Iron: 4mg

    Grilled Bacon Wrapped Pickles

    August 4, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 14 Comments

    When you take a bite of these grilled bacon wrapped pickles, the hot, crispy bacon and the fresh, juicy pickle come together with a creamy, garlic dip to create the perfect summer appetizer. A dash of barbecue sauce adds another level of summertime flavor to this already flavorful dish.

    Grilled, bacon wrapped pickles with toothpicks, on a white plate.

    When you host a barbecue, serve up some grilled bacon wrapped pickles to tide over your guests' hunger until the burgers and hot dogs are done. My creamy garlic dip makes a light, cooling sauce for your sizzling appetizers.

    Dill pickles, meat and garlic dip are low in carbs, making this a great appetizer for a keto diet. If you love bacon-wrapped food, you might also enjoy my bacon wrapped scallops recipe.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Grilled bacon wrapped pickles with creamy garlic dip ingredients labeled.
    • sour cream - For the dip. I use full fat but feel free to go light with your sour cream.
    • mayo - Also for the dip.
    • Worcestershire sauce - Enhances the flavor of the dip.
    • radishes - Grated finely.
    • baby dill pickles - In a pinch, you could slice a full-sized pickle for this recipe, but baby dill pickles are the perfect size for appetizers with the perfect amount of crunch, juice and texture.
    • bacon strips - Cut in half crosswise. I like to use classic cut bacon because it's easier to wrap around and easier to secure to the pickle.
    • BBQ sauce - To brush onto the pickles.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Grilled Bacon Wrapped Pickles

    For the Creamy Garlic Dip

    Creamy garlic and radish dip in bowl with whisk.

    Step 1. Make the Dip. Mix all dip ingredients together. Reserve.

    For the Grilled Pickles

    Grill Temperature: Heat the outdoor grill to medium-high heat. Once it reaches that temperature, turn off half of the burners (for indirect heat) and place a mesh grill mat over the indirect-heat side of the grill.

    Raw bacon wrapped pickles with toothpicks on plate.

    Step 2. Wrap the Pickles. Wrap each pickle in one of the bacon slices. Secure it with a toothpick.

    Raw bacon wrapped pickles with BBQ sauce on plate.

    Step 3. Brush With BBQ Sauce. While you're waiting for the grill to preheat, brush the bacon-wrapped pickles with some BBQ sauce.

    Bacon wrapped pickles on grill mat over indirect heat.

    Step 4. Grill Over Indirect Heat. Place the bacon-wrapped pickles on the grill mat (indirect heat) and close the grill lid. Cook for about 20 minutes or until bacon is fully cooked.

    Bacon wrapped pickles on grill mat over direct heat.

    Step 5. Grill Over Direct Heat. Move the pickles over to the direct heat for a few minutes, turning a couple of times, to crisp up the bacon.

    Chef's Note: If some crisp up quicker than the others, just move them over to the indirect heat side to keep warm.

    A grilled bacon wrapped pickle on a toothpick held by a hand over top of dipping sauce in a wooden bowl.

    Step 6. Serve. Transfer the grilled bacon-wrapped pickles to a serving dish, cool for a few minutes and serve with the garlic dip.

    Joss' Tips

    • Make sure the pickles are dry. After you remove them from the brine, just make sure to shake off or pat down the excess brine so that the bacon can crisp up easily.
    • Cut the strips to size. If some of the pickles are very small, you can cut the bacon strips to a shorter length. You do not want to overlap the bacon too much, as this can lead to parts of the bacon being undercooked.
    • Use a mesh grill mat. I highly recommend using the grill mat. It makes it easier to move the pickles from one side of the grill to the other, plus it's easy to clean. It's perfect for small appetizers like these grilled bacon-wrapped pickles.
    • Give your guests variety. You could also add a few of your favorite dips (such as this honey dill dip) to give your guests a variety of dipping options.
    • Focus on presentation. If you're serving these grilled pickles to a group of people, arrange the appetizers on a plate with a bowl of dip in the middle. Use tongs or fresh toothpicks to make it easy for your guests to pick up an appetizer.
    • Re-purpose the dip. The garlic dip is perfect for bacon-wrapped pickles, but you can pair it with just about anything that's meant for dipping--chips, breadsticks, mini toasts, crusty bread, chicken fingers, fries, raw vegetables and anything else you can think of that you serve with dip.
    • Re-purpose the grilled bacon-wrapped pickles. As a way to repurpose the leftovers, you could chop up the bacon wrapped dill pickles and make a smoky dill pickle cream cheese spread.

    Storage

    • For the dip: Store the dip in a sealed container in the fridge so that it retains its freshness for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • For leftover grilled bacon wrapped pickles: It's unlikely that you'll have leftovers, but if you do, store your grilled pickles in the fridge as soon as possible. Eat them within a few days for maximum freshness.
    • Reheating: Once they're cooked, you can heat up the appetizers in the microwave or throw them in a frying pan to keep the bacon crispy.

    Grilled Bacon Wrapped Pickle FAQs

    Are pickles good with barbecue?

    Oh yes, just try out this recipe and see for yourself! The combination of tangy pickle with smoky BBQ is amazing.

    What do grilled pickles taste like?

    The pickling flavor is more pronounced with a subtle smokiness from the grill. They're absolutely delicious, especially when wrapped in smoky bacon and brushed with a tangy barbecue sauce.

    Are they keto-friendly?

    The grilled pickles are keto-friendly as long as you use a keto BBQ sauce. The dip has mostly low-carb ingredients but does contain Worcestershire sauce. If you're following a low-carb diet, you might want to omit the Worcestershire.

    Grilled, bacon wrapped pickles on toothpicks, on a white plate, with dipping sauce and baby dill pickles on the side.

    More Summer Grilling Recipes You Will Love

    • Carne asada nachos with cilantro dip drizzled on top.
      Carne Asada Nachos
    • Grilled shrimp and pineapple on rosemary skewers.
      Grilled Shrimp & Pineapple on Rosemary Skewers
    • Charred peppers on the grill.
      How to Grill Peppers
    • Grilled pierogies in basket.
      Grilled Pierogies

    If you tried this 🥓🥒 Grilled Bacon Wrapped Pickles Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grilled bacon-wrapped pickles on toothpicks on white dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 8 votes

    Grilled Bacon Wrapped Pickles

    When you take a bite of these grilled bacon-wrapped pickles, the hot, crispy bacon and the fresh, juicy pickle come together with a creamy garlic dip to create the perfect summer appetizer.
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 16 pickles
    Calories 54kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill
    • Toothpicks
    • Grill mat

    Ingredients

    For the Creamy Garlic Dip

    • ½ cup sour cream
    • ½ cup mayo
    • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
    • 1 garlic clove minced
    • ¼ cup radishes grated
    • salt and pepper to taste

    For the Grilled Pickles

    • 16 baby dill pickles
    • 8 slices bacon cut in half crosswise
    • BBQ sauce to brush on the pickles
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Creamy Garlic Dip

    • Mix all dip ingredients together. Reserve in the fridge until ready to serve.

    For the Grilled Pickles

    • Wrap each pickle in one of the bacon slices. Secure it with a toothpick.
    • Heat the outdoor grill to medium-high heat. Once it reaches that temperature, turn off half of the burners (for indirect heat) and place a mesh grill mat over the indirect-heat side of the grill.
    • While you're waiting for the grill to preheat, brush the bacon-wrapped pickles with some BBQ sauce.
    • Place the bacon-wrapped pickles on the grill mat (indirect heat) and close the grill lid. Cook for about 20 minutes or until bacon is fully cooked.
    • Move the pickles over to the direct heat for a few minutes, turning a couple of times, to crisp up the bacon. (If some crisp up quicker than the others, just move them over to the indirect heat side to keep warm.)
    • Transfer the bacon-wrapped pickles to a serving dish, cool for a few minutes and serve with the garlic dip.

    Notes

    • Note on nutrition info: The nutrition information for this recipe does not include the dip as the amount used would very greatly.
    • Bacon tip: If some of the pickles are very small, you can cut the bacon strips to a shorter length. You do not want to overlap the bacon too much, as this can lead to parts of the bacon being undercooked.
    • Avoid using wet pickles: After you remove them from the brine, just make sure to shake off or pat down the excess brine so that the bacon can crisp up easily.
    • Pickle size: In a pinch, you could slice a full-sized pickle for this recipe, but baby dill pickles are the perfect size for appetizers with the perfect amount of crunch, juice and texture.
    • Mesh grill mat: I highly recommend using the grill mat. It makes it easier to move the pickles from one side of the grill to the other, plus it's easy to clean. It's perfect for small appetizers like these pickles.
    • Dip storage: Store the dip in a sealed container in the fridge so that it retains its freshness for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Leftover grilled pickle storage: Store your grilled pickles in the fridge as soon as possible. Eat them within a few days for maximum freshness.
    • Reheating: Once they're cooked, you can heat up the appetizers in the microwave or throw them in a frying pan to keep the bacon crispy.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 54kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 642mg | Potassium: 82mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 123IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Grill Peppers

    July 28, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Below I will go over how to grill peppers! Hot and sizzling, grilled peppers make the perfect side dish, sandwich and burger topping or base for sauces like tomato sauce. Add olive oil and seasonings to finalize this quick, beginner-level dish.

    3 charred bell peppers on the grill.

    Grilled peppers are soft, tender and smoky with a charred skin, which is normally removed but you can leave it on to suit your purposes. I also have a tutorial for how to grill jalapeño poppers that I think you'll like.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🫑Ingredients

    Grilled bell pepper ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • bell peppers - Take your pic of colors (red, yellow, green). This recipe also works with hot peppers.
    • olive oil - You are going to either brush the oil over the peppers with a pastry brush or rub it all over with your hands to help with grilling.
    • garlic - The fresh garlic is optional for serving after the peppers have been grilled.
    • fresh parsley - This is also optional.
    • salt - Kosher salt, sea salt or pink salt work great.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    ♨️Grilling Instructions

    Whole bell peppers in bowl with olive oil.

    Step 1. Preheat grill and prep peppers. Heat a charcoal or gas grill to medium-high heat. If the peppers are large, they can be cored and sliced in half. Small peppers can be left whole. Brush each whole bell pepper with olive oil and lightly sprinkle with salt.

    3 bell peppers on the grill.

    Step 2. Place peppers on grill. Place the peppers on the grill, on their side. The sliced peppers should be placed skin side down.

    3 charred bell peppers on the grill.

    Step 3: Grill the peppers. Close the grill lid and cook until tender, flipping the peppers until they char on all sides. This will take about 10 to 15 minutes.

    3 charred bell peppers on the grill.

    Step 4: Cool. If you are serving the peppers with the skin, let them cool a few minutes and serve as desired. If you would like the skins removed (highly recommended), continue to the next step.

    Foil wrapped bell peppers on a wooden board.

    Step 5. Sweat the skins. Place the peppers in a paper bag or in foil and onto a cutting board. Let cool for about 10 minutes. This way, it will be easier to remove the skin.

    Red bell pepper getting the skin peeled off.

    Step 6. Remove skin & seeds. Remove the charred skin, core and seeds. Repeat for all of the peppers.

    Grilled, peeled peppers on cutting board.

    Pro Tip: The skin should be easy to peel off but if it isn't, you can use a paring knife.

    Grilled, peeled peppers on cutting board getting sliced.

    Step 7: Slice the peppers. Slice the peppers into strips and put them in a medium bowl.

    Grilled, sliced bell peppers in bowl with garlic.

    Step 8. Add flavoring. Drizzle a bit of olive oil on top. Sprinkle with the minced garlic, fresh parsley and salt, to taste. Serve as a side dish or as desired.

    🍽️Tips for Serving Grilled Peppers

    Grilled, sliced bell peppers in a bowl on wooden table.
    • You can serve grilled peppers as a side dish with other grilled vegetables like tomatoes, eggplant, zucchini and onions.
    • Serve them alongside grilled proteins like steak, kimchi grilled chicken, ground bison burgers or brats for a complete summer meal.
    • You can add a few slices to your sandwiches and wraps, such as this blackened chicken sandwich.
    • With rich olive oil and a sprinkle of garlic, grilled peppers make a delicious side dish all on their own or you can experiment with different side dishes.
    • You can use them the same way you would roasted peppers.
    • Planning a sit-down dinner? Red, yellow and green peppers make a festive, colorful addition to anyone's plate.
    • Stick with the classic olive oil and garlic, or try some of your favorite herbs and spices, such as basil, to bring out the mildly sweet-and-smoky flavor of your delicious peppers.

    ❓Grilled Pepper FAQs

    Are bell peppers spicy?

    Bell peppers are not spicy. Red, yellow and green bell peppers are mild in comparison to hot peppers and have a pleasant crunch when you bite into the flesh.

    However, they do taste slightly different from each other. Red bell peppers are the most ripe of the three and have the sweetest flavor, whereas green bell peppers are going to be a little more on the bitter side.

    How long does it take to grill peppers?

    Need a last-minute side dish for your barbecue? It takes only a few minutes to clean and season your peppers, then another ten minutes to cook them on the grill, until tender and charred.

    Plan for another ten minutes if you want to remove the skins. Overall, grilled bell peppers are a fairly quick side dish that can be grilled at the same time as the main.

    How long can you store grilled peppers?

    You can store them in a glass container or other airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Grilled, sliced peppers in bowl with fork.

    🔥More Smoky Grilling Recipes

    • Bratwurst sausages on the grill.
      How to Grill Bratwurst
    • Pizza on a grill.
      How to Grill Pizza
    • Grilled bacon-wrapped pickles on toothpicks on white dish.
      Grilled Bacon Wrapped Pickles
    • Grilled pierogies in basket.
      Grilled Pierogies

    If you tried this recipe tutorial for 🫑 How to Grill Peppers or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Charred peppers on the grill.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    How to Grill Peppers

    I will go over how to grill peppers to make the perfect side dish, sandwich and burger topping or base for sauces like tomato sauce. Add olive oil and seasonings to finalize this quick, beginner-level dish.
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt, Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Resting Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 28kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill

    Ingredients

    • 3 bell peppers of your choice red, yellow, green
    • olive oil to brush onto the peppers
    • 1-2 teaspoons garlic minced
    • fresh parsley chopped-to serve
    • salt to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Heat a charcoal or gas grill to medium-high. If the peppers are large, they can be cored and sliced in half. Small peppers can be left whole.
    • Brush each bell pepper with olive oil. Lightly sprinkle with salt.
    • Place the peppers on the grill, on their side. The sliced peppers should be placed skin side down.
    • Close the grill lid and cook until tender, flipping the peppers until they char on all sides. This will take about 10 to 15 minutes.
    • If you are serving the peppers with the skin, let them cool a few minutes and serve as desired.
    • If you would like the skins removed (highly recommended): Place the peppers in a paper bag or in foil and onto a cutting board and let cool for about 10 minutes. This way, it will be easier to remove the skin.
    • Remove the charred skin, core and seeds. The skin should be easy to peel off or you can use a paring knife.
    • Slice the peppers and put them in a medium bowl. Drizzle a bit of olive oil on top. Sprinkle with the minced garlic, fresh parsley and salt, to taste.
    • Serve as a side dish or as desired.

    Notes

    • The nutrition information only includes the bell peppers, as the other ingredients are optional and the amounts are not specified.
    • This recipe also works with hot peppers.
    • You can store them in a glass container or other covered container in the refrigerator for up to 4 to 5 days.
    • You can serve grilled peppers as a side dish alongside grilled proteins like steak, chicken, burgers or brats for a complete summer meal. You can add a few slices to your sandwiches and wraps etc.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 28kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 188mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 2794IU | Vitamin C: 114mg | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Grill Onions (3 Ways)

    July 24, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Do you feel like your burger is missing something?! It's probably begging for grilled onions. I will go over how to grill onions step-by-step including wedges, rings and whole in foil packages.

    Grilled red onion rings in bowl with fresh rosemary.

    Besides avoiding heating your house during the hot summer months, grilling onions on the BBQ, whether it be red, yellow or white, also adds a smoky flavor and added texture to many dishes like burgers, salads or all on their own.

    You can grill up some frozen burgers all at the same time. The onions also taste amazing on my pulled pork burgers, bacon butty sandwich and easy caprese pasta salad.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    How to Grill Onion Wedges

    These grilled onion wedges are great as a side dish or snack.

    Ingredients

    Grilled onion wedge ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • onions - I used yellow onions but you can use any kind you like.
    • olive oil - Helps with achieving a caramelized outside and tender inside. Also helps the salt to stick.
    • sea salt - You can use table salt, but sea salt is less processed.
    • fresh thyme - Or your favorite fresh herbs (optional).

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Instructions

    Yellow onion getting peeled.

    Step 1. Peel and trim the onions. Remove the outer layer of each onion and trim off the tops. Leaving the bottom intact will help keep the wedges together.

    Pro Tip: If you want to cut the bottom of the onions off, use a grill mat to place the wedges on when cooking. This will keep them from falling through the grates.

    Collage of cutting onions into wedges.

    Step 2. Cut into wedges. Cut the onions in half (Image 1), then cut each half into quarters (Image 2). Cut the quarters in half again (Image 3) to create 8 wedges per onion (Image 4).

    Onions wedges on grill with tongs.

    Step 3. Heat one side of the grill. Heat one side of the grill and arrange the onions on the indirect-heat side (no flame underneath), but still close to the fire.

    Onion wedges on grill with silicone brush.

    Step 4. Grill the onions. Brush them with olive oil, cover the grill and cook for 10 minutes. Flip them over and cook for about 10 more minutes, or until softened and slightly charred.

    Chef's Note: If using a charcoal grill: preheat to medium-high heat. Put the coals on one side of the grill to create an indirect heat zone. For a gas grill: turn half of the burners on to medium-high heat to create an indirect heat zone.

    Grilled onion wedges in dish.

    Step 5. Remove from grill. Place them on a plate and drizzle with some olive oil. Sprinkle with sea salt and fresh herbs, to taste.

    How to Grill Onion Rings

    If you're looking for onions to top your burgers or grilled brats with, these grilled onion rings are the way to go.

    Ingredients

    Grilled onion rings ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • onions - You can use red, yellow or white onions with this technique as well.
    • olive oil and balsamic vinegar - For the balsamic dressing--this is optional.
    • fresh rosemary - Herbs are also optional but they add some freshness and flavor to the vinaigrette.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    Instructions

    Red onion getting sliced into rings on cutting board.

    Step 1. Preheat and slice. Preheat the grill to medium heat. Peel the outer layer of the onions off. Trim off the tops and bottoms. Slice onions into ½ inch rings.

    Olive oil mixture in bowl.

    Step 2. Make the dressing/vinaigrette. Whisk together the olive oil, balsamic vinegar, salt and rosemary leaves in a small bowl.

    Red onion rings on grill getting brushed with vinaigrette.

    Step 3. Transfer rings to baking sheet. Arrange the onions on the baking sheet. Brush the tops with some of the oil/vinegar mixture, reserving the rest to serve with later.

    Red onion rings on sheet pan on the grill.

    Step 4. Grill the onions. Place the baking sheet on the preheated grill (medium heat). With the grill open, cook for about 8 to 10 minutes per side. You want the onions to caramelize a bit and soften.

    Chef's Note: If you aren't using the balsamic dressing, brush the tops of the onions with some olive oil.

    Grilled onion rings in tongs and small bowl.

    Step 5. Remove from grill. Remove the onion rings from the grill to a serving bowl. Toss with some of the reserved dressing.

    Grilled red onion rings in bowl.

    Step 6 Serve. Serve immediately!

    How to Grill Whole Onions in Foil

    Ingredients

    Red and yellow onions in wire basket.
    • onions - I used yellow onions but use whatever type you have on hand.
    • BBQ sauce - Pick your favorite.
    • Freshly chopped parsley - Optional.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    Instructions

    Step 1. Preheat the grill:

    Charcoal Grill: preheat to medium-high heat. Put the coals on one side of the grill to create an indirect heat zone.

    Gas Grill: turn half of the burners on to medium-high heat to create an indirect heat zone.

    Onion and BBQ sauce on foil sheet.

    Step 2. Add onion to foil. Peel the outer layer of the onion off. Cut the top and bottom off. Place it on a piece of foil, large enough to wrap completely around it. Add the BBQ sauce and parsley.

    Onion wrapped in foil pouch.

    Step 3. Close the foil pouch. Wrap the onion up in the foil, creating a foil package.

    Foil-wrapped onion on grill.

    Step 4. Grill. Place it on the grill over the indirect heat, close the lid and cook for 30 to 40 minutes, or until softened all the way through.

    Grilled whole onion on foil with BBQ sauce.

    Step 5. Serve. Carefully open up the foil package; it will be hot. Slice and serve, topped with fresh parsley, or as desired.

    Chef's Note: You can serve the onion whole, but you can also slice it as desired and serve it with this caprese salad, on top of a grilled bison burger or any way you choose!

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does it take to grill onions?

    Onions are grilled perfectly when slightly charred and softened. The time it takes to achieve this will depend on the cut (wedges, slices, whole), the temperature of the grill, etc. Slices and wedges will have a similar cooking time (about 20 minutes) but it will take longer for a whole onion (about 40 minutes).

    How do you grill onions without burning them?

    To avoid burning, I like to grill my onions over indirect heat on the grill and/or use a baking pan. Also, keep a close eye on them!

    More Easy Grilling Tutorials

    • Charred peppers on the grill.
      How to Grill Peppers
    • Cooked bacon on the outdoor grill.
      How to Grill Bacon Outdoors
    • Grilled pineapple rings on serving dish.
      How to Grill Pineapple Slices
    • Grilled broccoli on plate with tongs.
      How to Grill Broccoli

    If you tried this recipe tutorial for 🧅 How to Grill Onions (Wedges, Rings & in Foil) or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grilled red onion rings in bowl on kitchen towel.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Grilled Onions 3 Ways

    Here I will go over how to grill onions step-by-step including wedges, rings and whole in foil packages. Whether it be red, yellow or white, onions adds a smoky flavor and added texture to many dishes like burgers, salads or all on their own.
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt, Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 11kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill

    Ingredients

    For Onion Wedges:

    • 2 medium yellow onions
    • olive oil
    • sea salt
    • fresh thyme or your favorite fresh herbs optional

    For Onion Rings:

    • 2 medium red onions
    • 3 tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
    • sea salt to taste
    • fresh rosemary leaves optional

    For Whole Onion in Foil:

    • 1 medium yellow onion
    • 2 tablespoons BBQ sauce
    • freshly chopped parsley optional
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For Onion Wedges:

    • Remove the outer layer of each onion and trim off the tops. Leaving the bottom intact will help keep the wedges together.1
      2 medium yellow onions
    • Cut the onions in half, then cut each half into quarters. Cut the quarters in half to create 8 wedges per onion.
    • If using charcoal, put the coals on one side of the grill to create an indirect heat zone at medium-high heat. If using gas, turn half of the burners on to medium-high heat. Arrange the onions on the indirect-heat side (no flame underneath), but still close to the fire.
    • Brush them with olive oil, cover the grill and cook for 10 minutes. Flip them over and cook for about 10 more minutes, or until softened and slightly charred.
    • Place them on a plate and drizzle with some more olive oil. Sprinkle with sea salt and fresh herbs, to taste.

    For Onion Rings:

    • Preheat the grill to medium heat. Peel the outer layer of the onions off. Trim off the tops and bottoms. Slice onions into ½ inch rings.
      2 medium red onions
    • Whisk together the olive oil, balsamic vinegar, salt and rosemary leaves (if using) in a small bowl.
      3 tablespoons olive oil, 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
    • Arrange the onions on the baking sheet. Brush the tops with some of the oil/vinegar mixture, reserving the rest to serve with later.2
    • Place the baking sheet on the preheated grill (medium heat). With the grill open, cook for about 8 to 10 minutes per side. You want them to caramelize a bit and soften.
    • Remove the onion rings from the grill to a serving bowl. Toss with some of the reserved oil/vinegar mixture.
    • Serve!

    For Whole Onion in Foil:

    • Charcoal Grill: preheat to medium-high heat. Put the coals on one side of the grill to create an indirect heat zone.
      Gas Grill: turn half of the burners on to medium-high heat to create an indirect heat zone.
    • Peel the outer layer of the onion off. Cut the top and bottom off. Place it on a piece of foil, large enough to wrap completely around it. Add the BBQ sauce and parsley.
      1 medium yellow onion, 2 tablespoons BBQ sauce
    • Wrap the onion up in the foil, creating a foil package.
    • Place it on the grill over the indirect heat, close the lid and cook for 30 to 40 minutes, or until softened all the way through.
    • Carefully open up the foil package; it will be hot. Slice and serve, topped with fresh parsley, or as desired.

    Notes

    1. If you want to cut the bottom of the onions off for the wedges, use a grill mat to place them on when cooking. This will keep them from falling through the grates.
    2. The balsamic dressing is optional for the onion rings. If not using the dressing, brush the onions with some olive oil instead.
    3. The nutrition information is for 1 serving of a yellow onion.
    4. Cooked onions can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 5 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 11kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 40mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Grill Frozen Burgers

    July 21, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 5 Comments

    Check out how to grill frozen burgers without thawing them first and still have that same juicy, flavorful patty in a short time!

    Cooked burger patties on a cast iron pan, on wooden table.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You Will Love This Technique

    • Easy and quick. Burgers on the grill have an amazing, savory taste with a subtle smoky flavor that is just what we crave for summer outings or social gatherings. But if you are in a pinch and you only have frozen burgers, you can grill them straight from frozen on gas or charcoal without adding a ton of extra cook time.
    • Delicious crust. I have found that grilling the frozen burgers vs. frying burgers in a skillet results in a more delicious, caramelized crust.
    • Convenient. Frozen burgers are convenient and great to have on hand when you are craving a last minute BBQ dinner.
    • Versatile. I like to use this method for not only beef burgers but all types like salmon, chicken, veggie, turkey, bison burgers, etc.
    • Can make them from scratch and freeze them. You can easily buy your favorite ground meat, mix in some spices, shape them into patties and freeze them yourself. To get a little more adventurous, you can go as far as grinding the meat yourself.

    How Long Does it Take To Grill Frozen Burgers?

    As for how long to grill frozen burgers, I usually do about 15 minutes while flipping them every five minutes. However, burger cooking times will vary, depending on your grill, burger thickness and how well done you like them.

    For this recipe, since you are cooking the beef burgers from frozen, you are going to want to cook them to an internal temperature of 160°F for food safety reasons. However, if you are cooking frozen seafood, chicken or turkey burgers, the recommended temperature is 165°F.

    Frozen Beef, Lamb & Pork Burgers = 160°F

    Frozen Seafood, Chicken and Turkey Burgers = 165°F

    Store-bought ground beef tends to contain a lot of bacteria from the work area. This is why some people choose to grind their own cuts of meat at home in order to enjoy a medium-rare burger.

    Ingredients

    Raw frozen burger patties on cast iron dish.
    • frozen burger patties - There is no need to thaw them first. We are grilling them straight from frozen.
    • hamburger buns - My favorite buns for hamburgers are brioche or sesame seed.
    • toppings and condiments - Pick your favorite. I love onions, lettuce and this burger sauce.

    Instructions

    Raw frozen burger patties in a package.

    Step 1. Preheat grill. Preheat the grill to medium-high heat. Remove burger patties from the freezer.

    Raw frozen burger patties in a package with paper separators.

    Step 2. Separate patties. Separate the burger patties and remove the papers.

    Burger patties on the grill.

    Step 3. Grill the burgers. Place the frozen patties on the grill and cook for about 15 minutes, flipping every 5 minutes (or until the burgers are cooked through to an internal temperature of 160°F).

    Burger patties on the charcoal grill.

    Step 4. Add cheese (optional). If you are adding cheese slices, add them during the last minute or two.

    Chef's Note: If they were not seasoned, you can season them with some salt and pepper once they start to thaw on the grill. This is completely optional.

    Cooked burger patties on a cast iron pan.

    Step 5. Remove the patties and serve. Remove the burgers from the grill and let them rest for 5 to 10 minutes. Toast the buns lightly, if desired. It should take only 1 to 2 minutes. Add the patties to the hamburger buns with toppings and condiments of your choice. Serve!

    These grilled onions and grilled peppers go great with burgers!

    Tips

    • No need to smash. Fight the urge to smash them against the grid of the gas grill for a small fire show. They will lose their round shape, the juices will spill out, and the juices may get into the heat and catch your burgers on fire.
    • Flare ups. Keep an eye on the burgers for flare ups. If they are flaring up too much, move them so they aren't over direct flame and/or close the lid.
    • Hot spots. Be aware that some parts of the grill are hotter than others, so move the burgers around depending on their doneness.
    • First flip. Flip the patty for the first time when you start to see the juices bubble up to the surface.
    • Lid open or closed. If it's a windy day or the grill doesn't seem to be cooking the burgers fast enough, you can close the lid to retain more heat but keep an eye on them. This works well especially if the burgers are on the thicker side (over ¾ inch). However, I find that my burgers cook just fine with the lid open.

    Frozen Burger Grilling FAQs

    How do you separate frozen burgers?

    If they don't separate easily by hand, I like to place the frozen burgers on a cutting board on their side and carefully wedge a butter knife in between the patties where there is a groove. Then I gently tap in a downward motion towards the cutting board. They should come apart quite easily and quickly this way.

    Do they need seasoning?

    You shouldn't have to season frozen burgers as they are typically already seasoned and good to go. If they aren't seasoned, however, you can sprinkle them with some salt and pepper after they have thawed for a few minutes or while they are cooking.
    Raw burger patties getting seasoned.

    What is the recommended grill temperature?

    When it comes to grilling them, I recommend keeping the grill temperature at medium-high or lower. If it is too high, it will cook the outside of the burger quicker but leave the inside raw.

    How long are frozen burgers good for?

    They can last up to 4 to 5 months in the freezer, depending on how well you package them. If you were to thaw them in the refrigerator, they should be cooked within 1 to 2 days. Cooked burgers will last up to 3 to 4 days in the fridge, covered.

    Grilled burgers stacked on cast iron dish.

    More Amazing Grilling Recipes

    • Grilled bread on outdoor grill with tongs.
      How to Grill Bread
    • Pizza on a grill.
      How to Grill Pizza
    • Grilled corn on wooden board.
      How to Grill Corn on the Cob
    • Grilled jalapeño poppers on black serving board.
      How to Grill Jalapeño Poppers

    If you tried this recipe technique for 🍔 how to grill frozen burgers or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grilled burgers on metal flipper, grill grates in the background.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    How to Grill Frozen Burgers

    Check out how to grill frozen burgers without thawing them first and still have that same juicy, flavorful patty in a short time.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, German
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 231kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill

    Ingredients

    • 4 frozen hamburger patties
    • 4 hamburger buns
    • desired toppings
    • salt and pepper optional

    Instructions

    • Preheat the grill to medium-high heat. Remove burger patties from the freezer.
      Raw burger patties in a package.
    • Separate the patties and remove the papers.
      Raw burger patties in a package with paper separators.
    • Place the frozen patties on the grill and cook for about 15 minutes, flipping every 5 minutes (or until the burgers are cooked through to an internal temperature of 160°F). If they were not seasoned, you can season them with some salt and pepper once they start to thaw on the grill. If you are adding cheese slices, add them during the last minute or two.
      Burger patties on the charcoal grill.
    • Remove the burgers from the grill and let them rest for 5 to 10 minutes. Toast the buns lightly, if desired. It should take only 1 to 2 minutes. Add the patties to the hamburger buns with toppings and condiments of your choice. Serve!
      Cooked burger patties on a cast iron pan, on wooden table.

    Notes

    • Nutrition info. The nutrition information is for 1 standard burger patty, so keep in mind that this will vary.
    • Flare ups. Keep an eye on the burgers for flare ups. If they are flaring up too much, move them so they aren't over direct flame and/or close the lid.
    • Hot spots. Be aware that some parts of the grill are hotter than others, so move the burgers around depending on their doneness.
    • Lid closed or open. If it's a windy day or the grill doesn't seem to be cooking the burgers fast enough, you can close the lid to retain more heat but keep an eye on them. This works well especially if the burgers are on the thicker side (over ¾ inch). However, I find that my burgers cook just fine with the lid open.
    • Separating the burgers tip. If they don't separate easily by hand, I like to place the frozen burgers on a cutting board on their side and carefully wedge a butter knife in between the patties where there is a groove. Then I gently tap in a downward motion towards the cutting board. They should come apart quite easily and quickly this way.
    • Seasoning. You shouldn't have to season frozen burgers as they are typically already seasoned and good to go. If they aren't seasoned, however, you can sprinkle them with some salt and pepper after they have thawed for a few minutes or while they are cooking.
    • Storage. Frozen burger patties can last up to 4 to 5 months in the freezer, depending on how well you package them. If you were to thaw them in the refrigerator, they should be cooked within 1 to 2 days. Cooked burgers will last up to 3 to 4 days in the fridge, covered.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 231kcal | Protein: 17g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 84mg | Potassium: 304mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 2mg

    How to Grill Bacon Outdoors

    July 14, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    If you're looking for a new method for cooking your bacon, here are some tips and information on how to grill bacon outdoors.

    Bacon is a favorite food of many and is great to eat at any time: breakfast, lunch and dinner. But have you ever tried grilling it? It turns out that by grilling the bacon, it can make it crispier and less greasy.

    Crispy bacon on a black board, with fresh tomatoes and knife on the side.

    The grill pan keeps bacon from sticking or falling through the grates, the indirect cooking method won't produce a burnt bacon strip, the excess grease drips away, and the final result has an extra smoky flavor and delightful crispness.

    These are the reasons why I always try to grill anything wrapped in bacon, like with my grilled jalapeño poppers and grilled bacon-wrapped pickles for that extra bit of smokiness and char. I also have a tutorial for how to cook crispy bacon in the oven.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Raw bacon strips on black board.

    The only ingredient you will need is raw center-cut (leaner) bacon strips. You can also use thick-cut but keep in mind they will take longer to cook.

    Equipment

    Grill pan.

    You will also need a grill pan or mat and an outdoor grill. If you are unfamiliar with what a grill pan is, it is a metal pan with holes and sometimes handles. It makes cleaning easier and the bacon won't stick to the gas grill.

    Instructions

    To begin, preheat an outdoor grill to medium-high heat. Once it reaches that temperature, turn off half of the burners to create an indirect cooking area.

    Bacon on a grill mat on the grill.

    Step 1. Grill the bacon. Place bacon strips on a grill mat or grill pan and then onto the grill on the indirect heat side (no flame underneath). Close the lid and grill the bacon until golden and crispy (about 10 to 15 minutes per side). Keep an eye on it to check for doneness.

    Crispy grilled bacon on paper towel.

    Step 2. Remove grease. Take the bacon off the grill and remove excess grease with paper towels.

    Grilled bacon on outdoor table with fresh herbs and tomatoes on the side.

    Step 3. Serve. Serve it as is or you can add your freshly, grilled bacon to sandwiches (like this bacon sandwich) and even desserts like these maple bacon cake balls.

    Bacon Grilling Tips

    • Let the bacon sit. My first tip on how to grill bacon is to preheat the gas grill and while that is happening, let your bacon sit at room temperature, for approximately 10 minutes. This will help to cook the bacon more evenly and take less time overall.
    • Choose leaner bacon. Choose center-cut bacon if you can find it because it is more lean, which I find is better for grilling.
    • Don't overlap the bacon. Be aware of how many pieces of bacon you put in the grill pan. Layering the bacon will not cook the bacon evenly and you may have pieces that are undercooked or raw. When you put the bacon in the grill pan, keep the strips a couple inches apart.
    • Use indirect heat. The excess grease can drip into the flames and cause massive flare ups as well as catch the bacon strips on fire. This is why we cook the bacon over indirect heat. Make sure to stay by the grill to keep a check on the temperature, doneness or any possible flare ups.
    • Avoid burning the bacon. The indirect heat in this recipe will help to avoid excessive amounts of combusted carbon on your bacon. Combusted carbon comes from cooking meat at a high heat. While a small amount is usually fine, a large amount can be harmful to the body.
    • Clean the grill. Clean up the grill well afterwards so that you aren't leaving it greasy for your next cook!

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does it take to grill bacon?

    How long it takes to grill bacon can depend on the thickness, the exact temperature inside your grill and how crispy you like it. It can take anywhere from 15 to 30 minutes based on all of those factors.

    For this recipe at medium-high heat, it takes approximately 10 to 15 minutes per side. Keep an eye on the bacon and take it off the grill once it looks crispy on both sides and fully cooked.

    Should you grill bacon on foil?

    If you are using indirect heat on the outdoor grill and placing the bacon on a grill mat, there is no need for foil. This is my preferred method.

    Should you flip bacon on the grill?

    Flip the bacon halfway through grilling so that both sides become golden and crispy.

    More Delicious Grilled Mains

    • Grilled halibut tacos on brown serving tray.
      Grilled Halibut Tacos
    • Pizza on a grill.
      How to Grill Pizza
    • Grilled burgers on metal flipper, grill grates in the background.
      How to Grill Frozen Burgers
    • Marinated flank steak cooking on charcoal grill.
      How to Grill Carne Asada

    If you tried this recipe tutorial for 🥓 How to Grill Bacon or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Cooked bacon on the outdoor grill.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    How to Grill Bacon Outdoors

    If you're looking for a new method for cooking your bacon, here is a recipe tutorial for how to grill bacon outdoors. The indirect cooking method won't produce a burnt bacon strip, the excess grease drips away, and the final result has an extra smoky flavor and delightful crispness.
    Course Breakfast, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 473kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill
    • Grill mat

    Ingredients

    • 1 pound center-cut bacon
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat an outdoor grill to medium-high heat. Once it reaches that temperature, turn off half of the burners to create an indirect cooking area.
      Raw bacon strips on black board.
    • Place bacon strips on a grill mat or grill pan and then onto the grill on the indirect heat side (no flame underneath). Close the lid and grill the bacon until golden and crispy (about 10 to 15 minutes per side). Keep an eye on it to check for doneness.
      Bacon on a grill mat on the grill.
    • Take the bacon off of the grill and remove excess grease with paper towels.
      Crispy bacon on paper towel.
    • Serve!
      Crispy bacon on a black board, fresh tomatoes and knife on the side.

    Notes

    • Clean up the grill well afterwards so that you aren't leaving it greasy for your next cook!
    • Choose center-cut bacon if you can find it because it is more lean, which I find better for grilling.
    • Let your bacon sit at room temperature while the grill is heating up, for approximately 10 minutes. This will help to cook the bacon more evenly and take less time.
    • Keep the bacon strips close to the flame so that they cook, but not directly over the flame. If grease drips into the flame, this causes a lot of flare-ups and we want to avoid those. This is why bacon should be cooked over indirect heat and why you should always stay by the grill while cooking.
    • Be aware of how many pieces of bacon you put in the grill pan. Layering the bacon will not cook the bacon evenly and you may have pieces that are undercooked or raw. When you put the bacon in the grill pan, keep the strips a couple inches apart.
    • If you are unfamiliar with what a grill pan is, it is a metal pan with holes and sometimes handles. It makes cleaning easier and the bacon won't stick to the gas grill.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 473kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 45g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 75mg | Sodium: 751mg | Potassium: 225mg | Vitamin A: 42IU | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Grill Carne Asada

    July 7, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    I will show you how to grill carne asada on the outdoor grill with a spicy marinade and a fresh cut of flank steak. This juicy, flavorful steak dish offers a high-end alternative to burgers and hot dogs. The meat is hot and sizzling when you take it off the grill; when you slice into it, you can see how deliciously juicy it is.

    Thinly sliced carne asada on cutting board on outdoor table.

    While I normally spend time grilling more typical meats like my Korean kimchi beef burgers and pork tenderloin skewers, every now and then I get a craving for the flavors and juiciness of carne asada.

    I love serving it with my grilled pineapple slices or grilled mango skewers to brighten it up with fruity flavors. This hemp salad is also nice.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Carne Asada?

    What is carne asada, anyway? Carne asada is a piece of steak that you marinate, sear on the grill and slice thinly to bring out the juicy, smoky flavor. Carne asada is a Latin American word that translates to 'grilled meat' in English.

    3 Reasons to Make it This Summer

    1. Flank steak is nice and big, so when you slice it up it serves many people. One large steak can feed 4 to 6 people.
    2. It's an affordable cut of meat but it's also versatile and under-recognized.
    3. The marinade is flavor-packed and tenderizes the meat nicely.

    Carne Asada Ingredients

    Carne asada ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • flank steak - Two of the best substitutes for flank steak are skirt steak and flat iron.
    • brown sugar - Adds a hint of sweetness and helps to create a nice char on the grill.
    • soy sauce (not pictured) - This will add a deep, salty flavor.
    • orange juice - The acidity in orange juice will help tenderize the meat.
    • spice mixture - The spices include red pepper flakes, oregano, smoked paprika, dried thyme and pepper.
    • cilantro - This will be used in the marinade and as a garnish. If you don't like cilantro, feel free to leave it out.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    Instructions

    Steak marinade whisked in bowl.

    Step 1. Whisk together the marinade ingredients.

    Flank steak getting transferred to bag of marinade.

    Step 2. Add the marinade and the flank steak to a zip-top bag.

    Flank steak marinating in zip-top bag.

    Step 3. Place it in the refrigerator to marinate for 4 hours.

    Raw, marinated flank stank in tongs.

    Step 4. Preheat a charcoal or gas grill to medium-high heat (around 400°F). Remove the steak from the marinade, letting most of the marinade drip off. Season with salt and pepper on both sides.

    Marinated flank steak on outdoor grill.

    Step 5. Place it onto the preheated grill and cook for approximately 6 to 8 minutes per side, or until desired doneness.

    Grilled carne asada on cutting board in tongs.

    Step 6. Remove from grill to a cutting board, tent it with foil and let rest for 10 minutes.

    Chef's Note: I recommend cooking the steak to an internal temperature of 130°F-135°F for medium-rare or around 140°-145°F for medium.

    Carne asada steak getting sliced with chef's knife.

    Step 7. Slice the steak against the grain.

    Carne asada steak sliced on cutting board.

    Step 8. Serve! Garnish with fresh cilantro if desired.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Side dishes: Try my summer burrata salad, easy kimchi potato salad or grilled avocado stuffed with pico de gallo.
    • Drinks: Tropical passion fruit mojitos or a strawberry slushy margarita.
    • Dessert: Try these margarita cake pops or some watermelon sticks.

    Carne Asada Tips

    Carne asada on cutting board with meat fork.

    Slice the meat at an angle. Learning this steak grilling technique is just as important as learning how to slice it afterward. Most experts recommend slicing the meat at an angle instead of cutting it vertically. Slicing diagonally produces a larger cut of meat and makes for better presentation.

    Go the extra mile and score your steak. Once you've learned how to grill carne asada, you can start experimenting with different methods. One popular tip involves scoring the steak before you soak it in the marinade. This allows the marinade to settle into the meat and infuse it with delicious spices. It also helps to make the meat easier to chew by cutting into the tough fibers.

    Pay attention to the marinade time. Carne asada is commonly marinated in an orange juice mixture, which helps to tenderize the meat. You should also think about how long you marinate your steak. In this recipe, I marinate it for four hours. You can let it marinate an hour or two shorter or longer, but the steak might become mushy if you let it soak any longer than that.

    Add some flavor with wood chips. When you grill your meat outdoors (like I do in my grilled frozen burgers tutorial), you can experiment with different wood chips. Cherry, hickory, apple and mesquite wood infuse your carne asada with different flavors, creating a unique dining experience every time. If you have a favorite wood that you use for burgers and brats, try using this wood when you grill carne asada.

    Turn the leftovers into something new and exciting. If you just so happen to have leftovers, you need to try these amazing carne asada nachos!

    Recipe FAQs

    How long do you grill carne asada?

    It should take about 6 to 8 minutes per side, depending on the thickness and desired temperature. I recommend medium-rare to medium.

    Should I close the grill when cooking carne asada?

    Typically, if the meat is thicker than ¾ inches, you can close the grill lid while it's cooking.

    Why do you need to let the steaks rest?

    The steaks should rest for 5 to 10 minutes to relax the muscle fibers and allow the juices to redistribute. The steak's internal temperature will rise a few degrees as you let it rest.

    How long do the leftovers last?

    Leftover carne asada can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    Carne asada sliced into thin strips on cutting board.

    ❤️More Meat-Based Recipes You Will Love

    • Cooked bacon on the outdoor grill.
      How to Grill Bacon Outdoors
    • Crispy bacon in grill pan with tongs.
      How to Cook Crispy Bacon - 3 Ways
    • Ground beef stir fry with veggies in bowl with chopsticks.
      Ground Beef Stir Fry
    • Bison chanterelle mushroom meat sauce in jar.
      Bison and Chanterelle Meat Sauce

    If you tried this recipe tutorial for How to Grill Carne Asada or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Marinated flank steak cooking on charcoal grill.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    How to Grill Carne Asada

    I will show you how to grill carne asada on the outdoor grill with a spicy marinade and a fresh cut of flank steak. This juicy, flavorful steak offers a high-end alternative to burgers and hot dogs.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Latin American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes minutes
    Marinating Time 4 hours hours
    Total Time 4 hours hours 17 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 175kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill

    Ingredients

    Marinade Ingredients

    • ¼ cup canola oil
    • ½ cup orange juice
    • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar
    • 1 teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes
    • ½ teaspoon oregano
    • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
    • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
    • 2 tablespoons cilantro chopped
    • 4 cloves garlic minced
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper

    For the Steak

    • 1 2-3 pound flank steak trimmed of excess fat
    • fresh cilantro leaves to garnish (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Whisk together the marinade ingredients. Add to a large zip-top bag.
      Steak marinade whisked in bowl.
    • Add the flank steak to the zip-top bag with the marinade and place it in the refrigerator to marinate for 4 hours.
      Flank steak marinating in zip-top bag.
    • Preheat a charcoal or gas grill to medium-high heat (around 400°F). Remove the steak from the marinade, letting most of the marinade drip off. Season with salt and pepper on both sides and place it onto the preheated grill.
      Raw, marinated flank stank in tongs.
    • Cook for approximately 6 to 8 minutes per side, or until desired doneness (130°F-135°F for medium-rare, around 140°-145°F for medium).
      Marinated flank steak on outdoor grill.
    • Remove from grill to a cutting board, tent it with foil and let rest for 10 minutes.
      Grilled carne asada on cutting board in tongs.
    • Slice the steak against the grain and serve, topped with the fresh cilantro.
      Carne asada steak getting sliced with chef's knife.

    Notes

    • Two of the best substitutes for flank steak are skirt steak and flat iron.
    • The steak's internal temperature will rise a few degrees as you let it rest. It should rest for 5 to 10 minutes to relax the muscle fibers and allow the juices to redistribute.
    • In this recipe, I marinate the steak for four hours. You can let it marinate an hour or two shorter or longer, but the steak might become a little mushy if you let it soak any longer than that.
    • Typically, if the meat is thicker than ¾ inches, you can close the grill lid while it's cooking.
    • Most experts recommend slicing the meat at an angle instead of cutting it vertically. Slicing diagonally produces a larger cut of meat and makes for better presentation.
    • Leftover carne asada can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 175kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 0.1mg | Sodium: 514mg | Potassium: 131mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 485IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 1mg

    Easy Homemade Strawberry Compote

    June 30, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    A sweet, fresh sauce can heighten flavors of both sweet and savory dishes, and this easy, homemade strawberry compote recipe will do just that. You can spruce up many dishes with its balanced sweet and tart flavors.

    Strawberry compote in a jar, orange juice in a glass on the side, wooden background.

    While it is mostly made from strawberries, the orange juice and orange zest give the compote a slight citrus zing. The addition of honey will help to add a sweet touch. If you have leftover strawberries when you're finished, check out how to make strawberry liqueur from fresh strawberries.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Strawberry Compote?

    Strawberry compote is a chunky fruit sauce made with strawberries that are slowly cooked with sugar syrup. It is a lot like my strawberry rhubarb compote but without the rhubarb.

    What makes it different from another fruit sauce, coulis, is that compote is a chunky sauce while strawberry coulis is made with puréed fruit, giving it a smoother texture.

    Ingredients

    Strawberry compote ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • strawberries - You can use fresh or frozen strawberries.
    • orange juice - I use freshly squeezed orange juice from navel oranges.
    • orange zest - You can use a microplane or the small hole side of a grater to get the zest. Navel oranges are great for zesting.
    • sugar - You can substitute with honey.
    • cornstarch - This is going to thicken it up a little.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    Strawberries, sugar and orange in saucepan.

    Step 1. Combine ingredients in saucepan. In a medium saucepan, combine the strawberries with the orange juice, orange zest, sweetener and salt.

    Strawberry compote mixture simmering in saucepan.

    Step 2. Simmer. Bring to a boil, then lower the heat to medium and simmer for about 5 minutes, stirring occasionally.

    Chef's Note: It will take longer to get to a boil if using frozen berries.

    Strawberry compote mixture in saucepan with cornstarch.

    Step 3. Thicken. Mix the cornstarch with 1 tablespoon cold water in a small bowl. Whisk it into the strawberry mixture and simmer for 1 more minute, until it thickens.

    Strawberry compote in saucepan.

    Step 4. Cool. Remove from heat and let cool.

    Strawberry compote in a jar and on a piece of toast, orange juice in a glass on the side, wooden background.

    Step 5. Serve! Serve as desired.

    Strawberry Compote Uses

    Strawberry compote on a piece of toast.

    While compote can be jarred, it is often used immediately in a dish, especially if it is homemade and from fresh fruit. When it comes to its use, it can be put on both sweet and savory dishes, the same way you would a jam.

    For sweet applications: you can top it on or mix it into strawberry shortcake ice cream and other ice cream flavors, cake, cheesecake in a jar, yogurt, pancakes, pancake bread, toast, English muffins, bagels, waffles, cheese strudel (topfenstrudel) or fill a cupcake with it.

    This compote would taste amazing over top of my chocolate chip orange zest muffins.

    As for savory applications: it is recommended to serve it with duck dishes like duck confit, seared duck breast or fois gras (fattened duck liver).

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you store strawberry compote?

    Store your compote in a glass jar or other airtight container in the refrigerator. It should last up to two weeks.

    What is compote made of?

    It's made of fruit and sugar cooked together.

    How long does it take for compote to thicken?

    It only takes 1 to 3 minutes to thicken with the addition of cornstarch.

    Strawberry compote in a jar, with toast and orange juice in a glass on the side, on wooden circular serving dish.

    🍓More Delicious Strawberry Recipes

    • Virgin frozen strawberry daiquiri in wine glass with strawberry-mint garnish.
      Virgin Frozen Strawberry Daiquiri
    • Strawberry parfait in stemmed glasses.
      Strawberry Parfait
    • Strawberry mojito mocktail pouring out of pitcher into glass with ice cubes.
      Strawberry Mojito Mocktail
    • Homemade strawberry milk with straw in jar on cutting board.
      Homemade Strawberry Milk

    If you tried this Easy Homemade Strawberry Compote Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry orange compote in jar with spoon and toast on the side.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Homemade Strawberry Compote

    This easy homemade strawberry compote recipe will spruce up your dishes with its balanced sweet and tart flavors. While it is mostly made from strawberries, the orange juice and orange zest give the compote a slight citrus zing.
    Course Dessert, Sauce
    Cuisine French
    Diet Low Salt, Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 ¼ cup servings
    Calories 42kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Small saucepan

    Ingredients

    • 1 pound strawberries cleaned, green parts removed and quartered
    • 3 tablespoons orange juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 teaspoon orange zest
    • 2 ½ tablespoons sugar or honey
    • 1 pinch salt
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium saucepan, combine the strawberries with the orange juice, orange zest, sweetener and salt.
      Strawberries, sugar and orange in saucepan.
    • Bring to a boil, then lower the heat to medium and simmer for about 5 minutes, stirring occasionally. You want to cook it until the berries just start to soften and break down.
      Strawberry compote mixture simmering in saucepan.
    • Mix the cornstarch with 1 tablespoon cold water in a small bowl. Whisk it into the strawberry mixture and simmer for 1 more minute, until it thickens.
      Strawberry compote mixture in saucepan with cornstarch.
    • Remove from heat and let cool.
      Strawberry compote in saucepan.
    • Serve!
      Strawberry compote in a jar, orange juice in a glass on the side, wooden background.

    Notes

    • You can use fresh or frozen strawberries. It will take longer to get to a boil if using frozen berries.
    • You can leave small strawberries whole or slice them in half.
    • Store your compote in glass jars in the refrigerator. It should last up to two weeks.
    • For sweet applications: you can top it on or mix it into strawberry shortcake ice cream and other ice cream flavors, cake, cheesecake, pancakes, toast, English muffins, bagels, waffles, or fill a cupcake with it.
    • As for savory applications: it is recommended to serve it with duck dishes like duck confit, seared duck breast or fois gras (fattened duck liver).

    Nutrition

    Calories: 42kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 102mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 20IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 1mg

    Strawberry Rhubarb Sauce (Compote)

    June 23, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Rhubarb season is upon us (usually spring to early summer) and to make use of this ingredient, I have cooked up a deliciously chunky strawberry-rhubarb sauce.

    Strawberry-rhubarb sauce in a glass, biscuits on the side.

    The tartness of rhubarb and the sweetness of strawberries come together in this vibrantly red sauce that makes the perfect topping for cake, ice cream, cottage cheese strudel, pancakes, pastries and even toast.

    While strawberry purée is smooth, this sauce is filled with delicious strawberry and rhubarb chunks.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Is Rhubarb a Fruit or Vegetable?

    Many people think rhubarb is a fruit due to its tart flavor that's reminiscent of green apples. It's technically a vegetable, but rhubarb has been legally ruled a fruit in a New York court, as it is used mainly in fruit applications. It is a popular filling and/or topping for tarts, pastries and other sweet desserts.

    Ingredients

    Strawberry rhubarb sauce ingredients prepped and labeled.

    To make this rhubarb sauce have a nice balance of tart and sweet, this recipe adds fresh strawberries along with lemon juice and some sugar. The sauce is thick with soft chunks of fruit and a deliciously sweet-yet-tart flavor. The orange liqueur is a nice addition to the sauce.

    • fresh rhubarb - You will find rhubarb a plenty at farmers' markets but it's also easy to grow in your own backyard.
    • fresh strawberries - You can also use frozen sliced strawberries; this will just add to the cook time.
    • sugar - White granulated sugar is what I use.
    • orange liqueur - Such as Grand Marnier or Triple Sec (you can substitute with orange juice if you prefer something non-alcoholic).
    • lemon juice - Freshly squeezed.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Rhubarb Sauce

    Making this rhubarb sauce (also called 'rhubarb compote') is a breeze: simply boil the ingredients together in a saucepan, let the mixture simmer for about fifteen minutes and serve warm or chill the sauce in the fridge.

    Once you know how to make rhubarb sauce, you'll have a delicious and unique ingredient that spruces up your pound cakes, homemade ice cream and other desserts and pastries.

    Strawberry rhubarb sauce ingredients in saucepan.

    Step 1. Combine ingredients in pot. In a small saucepan, combine the rhubarb, strawberries, sugar, salt, orange liqueur and freshly squeezed lemon juice. Mix.

    Strawberry rhubarb sauce simmering in saucepan.

    Step 2. Simmer. Bring to a boil over high heat. Lower the heat and simmer for about 15 minutes, until the fruit is softened and the liquid has thickened a bit. Stir occasionally. Remove from heat.

    Strawberry-rhubarb sauce in a spoon, biscuits on the side.

    Step 3. Serve or store. Serve warm or let cool to room temperature.

    How to Use it

    • Desserts and breakfast dishes. Once the flavors have all cooked together and the fruit chunks soften, this rhubarb and strawberry compote makes the perfect condiment for desserts and even breakfast dishes.
    • Drizzle it. You can drizzle it over just about anything. This includes slices of pound cake, mason jar cakes, ice cream, waffles, pancakes, toast, granola, pies, cheesecake and other sweet foods.
    • Stir it in. You could also make strawberry parfaits or stir it into some Greek yogurt.
    • Savory uses. Some people even experiment with savory dishes that could use a little sweet-and-tart flavor like this electric skillet pork tenderloin, ham or bison steak.
    • Spread. I like to spread it on a piece of toast with cream cheese.
    • Whatever the case, you can serve this sauce right off the stove or chill it in the fridge for later use. Chilled sauce is better for cold dishes like ice cream and yogurt, but warm sauce is great for dishes that will soak it up nicely or are served warm like cakes, muffins, waffles and pancakes. Just microwave it or heat it over the stove. You could also serve it at room temperature.

    Top Tip

    If you plan on freezing your strawberries and rhubarb before using in recipes like this compote, slice them first! That way you can add the fruit, from frozen, directly into the saucepan. If you thaw large sticks of rhubarb, they become quite soggy and harder to cut vs. fresh rhubarb.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you store strawberry-rhubarb sauce?

    Store your rhubarb sauce in air-tight containers in the fridge for up to two weeks or freeze it for up to 3 months. If you do freeze it, simply thaw it in the refrigerator overnight when you are ready to use it.

    Do you need to peel rhubarb before you cook it?

    There is no need to peel the rhubarb. It adds color and fiber and it gets soft when cooked down.

    Why combine strawberry and rhubarb?

    The sweetness of the strawberries and the tartness of the rhubarb balance each other's flavors perfectly.

    Strawberry-rhubarb sauce in a glass with a spoon and biscuits on the side.

    ❤️More Fruity Recipes You Will Love

    • Raspberry galette on marble and wooden cutting board.
      Raspberry Galette
    • Fruit salad in a glass dish on white tile.
      How to Make Fruit Salad
    • Blueberry mojito mocktail with fresh mint in cocktail glass.
      Blueberry Mojito Mocktail
    • Strawberry crumble in tart dish with vanilla ice cream and spoon.
      Easy Strawberry Crumble

    If you tried this 🍓 Strawberry Rhubarb Sauce (Compote) Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry rhubarb sauce in stemless wine glass with spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Strawberry Rhubarb Sauce (Compote) Recipe

    The tartness of rhubarb and the sweetness of strawberries come together in this vibrantly red strawberry-rhubarb sauce recipe that makes the perfect topping for cake, ice cream, pastries and even toast.
    Course Dessert, Sauce
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 ¼ cup servings
    Calories 51kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 ½ cups fresh rhubarb cut into ¾-inch chunks
    • 1 ½ cups fresh strawberries cleaned, hulled and thickly sliced
    • ½ cup sugar
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt
    • 2 tablespoons orange liqueur such as Grand Marnier or Triple Sec (you can substitute with orange juice if you prefer)
    • juice of 1 lemon freshly squeezed
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a small saucepan, combine the rhubarb, strawberries, sugar, salt, orange liqueur and freshly squeezed lemon juice. Mix.
    • Bring to a boil over high heat.
    • Lower the heat and simmer for about 15 minutes, until the fruit is softened and the liquid has thickened a bit. Stir occasionally. Remove from heat.
    • Serve warm or let cool to room temperature.

    Notes

    • There is no need to peel the rhubarb. It adds color and fiber and it gets soft when cooked down.
    • You can also use frozen, sliced strawberries and rhubarb; this just adds a little more cook time. I don't recommend thawing first, especially the frozen rhubarb, because it gets quite soggy and harder to cut. If you cut the fruit before freezing, you can add it from frozen directly into the saucepan.
    • Store your rhubarb sauce in air-tight containers in the fridge for up to two weeks or freeze it for up to 3 months.
    • If you do freeze the sauce, simply thaw it in the refrigerator overnight when you are ready to use it.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 51kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 21mg | Potassium: 85mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 20IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

    Easy Strawberry Crumble

    June 21, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 5 Comments

    A sweet, crunchy layer of brown sugar and oats covers the top of this easy strawberry crumble. When you dig your spoon through the crust, you'll find a deliciously sweet, fruity layer of strawberries, sugar and orange zest that melts in your mouth when you take a bite.

    Strawberry crumble in white tart dish with a light blue kitchen towel on the side.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❤️ Why I Love This Dessert

    • Easy - It only takes about ten minutes of preparation and the technique is easy.
    • Quick - After you combine the ingredients together and layer them in the dish, you'll have a hot, bubbling, strawberry dessert in only forty-five minutes of bake time.
    • Clean hands - My technique doesn't require any butter-rubbing for the crumble so you're not getting your hands dirty or worrying about over-mixing.
    • Make-ahead - You can make it ahead of time and freeze it for later.
    • Less food waste - It's a great way to use up fresh berries that might otherwise go bad.

    Featured Comment

    From Clowdia: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ "This truly is a simple and glorious dessert. I added chopped pecans to the flour and oatmeal mix and served this yummyness with vanilla bean ice cream."

    🍓 Ingredients

    Strawberry crumble ingredients prepped and labeled.

    If you're looking for a quick and easy dessert, it only takes fresh fruit, butter and a few pantry ingredients to create a delicious strawberry crumble.

    • fresh strawberries - Cleaned, hulled and quartered.
    • cornstarch - The cornstarch is needed to thicken the juices that are released from the strawberries during baking.
    • oranges - We are using the zest of the orange to add a pop of bright, zesty flavor to the filling.
    • butter - I use unsalted butter for this recipe so that we can control the salt amount.
    • oats - The crunch of the oats adds nice texture to this dish. You can use quick oats or rolled oats.
    • brown sugar - Brown sugar is the choice ingredient for a delicious crumble topping with deeper flavor.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    ⭐ I also have a plum crumble recipe you might like.

    🥣 How to Make Strawberry Crumble

    Strawberries and sugar in tart dish.

    Step 1. Preheat. Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place the strawberries in a 10" baking dish and add ½ cup granulated sugar.

    Strawberries, cornstarch and orange zest in tart dish.

    Step 2. Mix. Add the cornstarch and orange zest. Mix it all together.

    Dry strawberry crumble ingredients in tart dish.

    Step 3. Make the crumble. In a separate bowl, combine flour, brown sugar, oats and salt. This is the crumble topping.

    Strawberry crumble ingredients in tart dish.

    Step 4. Top the fruit. Top the strawberry mixture with the flour mixture, evenly.

    Strawberries, cornstarch and butter in tart dish.

    Step 5. Add butter and bake. Pour the melted butter evenly over top and bake for around 45 minutes, or until crumble topping is golden brown and the fruit is bubbling.

    Strawberry crumble in tart dish and dessert bowls.

    Step 6. Serve. Let cool for at least 15 minutes and serve the strawberry crumble!

    ✔️ Tips to Make Easy Strawberry Crumble

    • Perfect temperature - Baking the crumble at a temperature that isn't too high (350°F) gives the strawberry filling time to get perfectly soft and saucy.
    • Light hand - It's better to sprinkle the topping over the crumble then to press it down or it can become more on the cakey side.
    • Dish size - A 10" pie dish that is 2" deep works perfectly but I have gotten away with going as small as 9.5". Don't go any smaller because you will risk having the filling bubble over in the oven.
    • Set the filling - You need to let the crumble cool to let the fruit filling set up.

    🍽️ Serving Suggestions

    It may be a popular spring and summer dessert but we enjoy it year round.

    Hot crumble tastes great with a scoop of vanilla ice cream (or even homemade banana ice cream). At first, the ice cream adds a cool, creamy flavor to the hot dessert; as it melts, it seeps into the crumble and makes it richer and more flavorful.

    Whipped cream is another great, creamy topping for a warm crumble. You could also garnish your crumble with fresh strawberries for an extra burst of fruity flavor.

    Powdered sugar makes a great last-minute garnish if you don't have any ice cream in the freezer.

    Some people prefer this dish when it's fresh from the oven, but you could also chill it in the fridge if you prefer cold desserts, or eat it at room temperature.

    ❓ Easy Strawberry Crumble FAQs

    How do you store leftover strawberry crumble?

    Crumble desserts with sugar can be left at room temperature for up to two days. Just make sure they are covered properly. However, if you are uneasy about that, you can store the leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days.

    Should I freeze crumble before or after baking?

    You can freeze a fruit crumble both before or after baking for up to 4 months. Thaw in the refrigerator and bake/reheat in a 350°F oven until hot all of the way through.

    How do you keep crumble topping crisp?

    A good amount of butter (but not too much) is what's going to give you a crispy topping. Don't take the crumble out of the oven until it has become golden-brown in color. Reheat leftover crumble in the oven instead of the microwave to avoid a soggy topping.

    Strawberry crumble with ice cream in dessert bowls with spoons.

    🍓 More Strawberry Recipes You Will Love

    • Strawberry rhubarb sauce in stemless wine glass with spoon.
      Strawberry Rhubarb Sauce (Compote)
    • Strawberry pureé over custard in small jars.
      Easy Strawberry Purée (Coulis)
    • Strawberry vinaigrette dressing drizzling down spoon into small jar.
      Easy Strawberry Vinaigrette Dressing
    • Strawberry juice in a glass jar with a white straw on the side.
      Homemade Strawberry Juice

    If you tried this 🍓 Easy Strawberry Crumble Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry crumble in tart dish with vanilla ice cream and spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 6 votes

    Easy Strawberry Crumble

    If you're looking for a quick and easy dessert, it only takes fresh fruit, butter and a few pantry ingredients to create a delicious strawberry crumble.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine British
    Diet Low Salt
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 401kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 10" pie dish

    Ingredients

    • 4 cups fresh strawberries cleaned, hulled and quartered
    • ½ cup granulated sugar
    • 1 teaspoon cornstarch
    • 1 ½ teaspoons orange zest
    • 1 cup all-purpose flour
    • 1 cup oats can use rolled or quick
    • ¾ cup brown sugar
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¾ cup unsalted butter melted
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place the strawberries in a 10" baking dish and add ½ cup granulated sugar.
      4 cups fresh strawberries, ½ cup granulated sugar
      Strawberries and sugar in tart dish.
    • Add the cornstarch and orange zest. Mix it all together.
      1 teaspoon cornstarch, 1 ½ teaspoons orange zest
      Strawberries, cornstarch and orange zest in tart dish.
    • In a separate bowl, combine flour, oats, brown sugar and salt. Top the strawberry mixture with the flour mixture, evenly.
      1 cup all-purpose flour, 1 cup oats, ¾ cup brown sugar, ½ teaspoon salt
      Strawberry crumble ingredients in tart dish.
    • Pour the melted butter evenly over top and bake for around 45 minutes, or until crumble topping is golden brown and the fruit is bubbling.
      ¾ cup unsalted butter
      Strawberries, cornstarch and butter in tart dish.
    • Let cool for at least 15 minutes and serve!
      Strawberry crumble in tart dish and dessert bowls.

    Notes

    • Crumble desserts with sugar can be left at room temperature for up to two days, if they are covered properly.
    • You can store the leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days.
    • Make sure to cool the crumble to room temperature before covering it.
    • You can freeze a fruit crumble both before or after baking for up to 4 months. Thaw in the refrigerator and bake/reheat in a 350°F oven until hot all of the way through.
    • It's better to sprinkle the topping over the crumble then to press it down or it can become more on the cakey side.
    • A 10" pie dish that is 2" deep works perfectly but I have gotten away with going as small as 9.5". Don't go any smaller because you will risk having the filling bubble over in the oven.
    • Don't take the crumble out of the oven until it has become golden-brown in color. Reheat leftover crumble in the oven instead of the microwave to avoid a soggy topping.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 401kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 46mg | Sodium: 129mg | Potassium: 198mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 36g | Vitamin A: 544IU | Vitamin C: 44mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 2mg

    Easy Strawberry Purée (Coulis)

    June 16, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    Sometimes a good dessert needs a sweet, light sauce to add more variety in taste, and this easy strawberry purée recipe does just that with it's balanced sweet and tart flavors. It takes only a few minutes to prepare and the fresh strawberry flavor is amazing.

    Strawberry puree/coulis in 2 jars of vanilla pudding, on a wooden serving board.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Strawberry Purée?

    Strawberry 'purée' and strawberry 'coulis' are used interchangeably. They are a fruit sauce made from strawberries that have been blended and sometimes strained through a sieve and then sweetened with sugar. It can be cooked or raw but isn't chunky like my strawberry rhubarb sauce or strawberry compote. The sugar and lemon juice in this recipe are common ingredients in coulis.

    What is the Difference Between Purée and Coulis?

    A purée refers to vegetables or fruit that are brought to the consistency of a paste or liquid through blending, grinding, straining etc.

    Coulis is actually a French word for 'strained'. It is a strained purée used as a sauce that can also be made with both fruits or vegetables. However, the word coulis most often refers to fruit purées. A fruit coulis is usually added to sweet dishes as a topping/garnish. It can also be added to breakfast dishes like this moist pancake bread.

    Ingredients

    Strawberry pureé ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • fresh strawberries - If using frozen strawberries, thaw them first.
    • lemon juice - Freshly squeezed is best. It's an optional ingredient but it adds flavor and helps preserve color.
    • white sugar - Or another sweetener. This is also optional and will depend on how sweet your strawberries are and your personal taste.

    Instructions

    To make strawberry purée, all you need is a quick spin in a blender, a run through the sieve, and a mix of sugar and lemon juice. You are left with a quick and easy sauce for many desserts.

    Strawberries in mesh strainer.

    Step 1. Clean the strawberries. Remove the leaves from the strawberries. Rinse the strawberries under cool water.

    Chopped fresh strawberries on cutting board.

    Step 2. Chop the strawberries. Roughly chop the strawberries.

    Chopped strawberries in blender jar.

    Step 3. Blend. Place strawberries in a food processor or blender and process until smooth.

    Strawberry puree in a glass bowl on wooden serving board.

    Step 4. Strain (optional). If you don't like the crunch from the seeds: strain the purée through a fine mesh strainer, pushing with the back of a spoon against the strainer to get as much purée out as you can.

    Strawberry puree on top of custard in jars with wooden spoons.

    Step 5. Sweeten (optional). Depending on the sweetness of the strawberries, you may want to add some sweetener. Add the sugar and lemon juice, to taste. Serve!

    Freezing Tips

    If you find yourself with more purée than you need, here are some tips on how to freeze fruit purée:

    • Ice cube tray. One way is to pour the purée in an ice tray and let it freeze overnight. Once the purée is frozen, transfer the cubes to a freezer-safe bag and label the date with a marker. Keep them in the freezer until ready to use.
    • In jars. You can also freeze them in jars or other containers. Always leave some headspace. This is because once it is frozen, the liquid will expand.
    • Correct temperature. Make sure your freezer temperature is at or lower than 0 degrees Fahrenheit (or -18 degrees Celsius).

    Strawberry Purée Uses

    • You can add the strawberry purée on top of custard (as pictured in the instructions), pancakes, ice cream, cheesecake, pavlova, yogurt, muffins, cupcakes (including as a filling), Canada day themed desserts and other baking.
    • It's especially good over cakes such as angel food cake or yogurt cake.
    • Add it to frosting, starting with a small amount.
    • Add it to smoothies.
    • Add it to drinks/cocktails like lemonade or margaritas, or whatever drink you desire.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is strawberry purée the same as jam?

    Strawberry purée and strawberry jam are quite distinct. Purée is simply mashed and strained strawberries with a bit of sweetener, while jam is cooked with lots of sugar.

    How long does fruit purée last in fridge?

    You can store your homemade fruit purée in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.

    A muffin with strawberry purée on small plate.

    🍓More Amazing Strawberry Recipes

    • Strawberry crumble in tart dish with vanilla ice cream and spoon.
      Easy Strawberry Crumble
    • Strawberry champagne cake balls stacked on plate.
      Strawberry Champagne Cake Balls
    • Homemade strawberry milk with straw in jar on cutting board.
      Homemade Strawberry Milk
    • Strawberry shortcake ice cream in martini glasses with syrup pouring out of spoon.
      Strawberry Shortcake Ice Cream

    If you tried this 🍓 Easy Strawberry Purée/Coulis Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry pureé over custard in small jars.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Strawberry Purée (Coulis)

    This homemade strawberry purée/coulis is a quick and easy sauce for all sorts of desserts like cheesecake, custard, muffins, ice cream and more.
    Course Dessert, Sauce
    Cuisine French
    Diet Low Salt
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 ¼ cup servings
    Calories 38kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Blender
    • Fine mesh strainer

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups fresh strawberries

    Optional:

    • 1 tablespoon sugar or to taste
    • freshly squeezed lemon juice to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Remove the leaves from the strawberries. Clean and chop the strawberries.
    • Place strawberries in a food processor or blender and process until smooth.
    • If you don't like the crunch from the seeds: strain the purée through a fine mesh strainer, pushing with the back of a spoon against the strainer to get as much purée out as you can.
    • Depending on the sweetness of the strawberries, you may want to add some sweetener. Add the sugar and lemon juice, to taste.
    • Serve! You can add the strawberry purée to ice cream, pancakes, yogurt, muffins, in beverages and smoothies, etc.

    Notes

    • If using frozen strawberries, thaw them first.
    • Strawberry 'purée' and strawberry 'coulis' are terms that are used interchangeably.
    • You can freeze the puree in jars or other containers. Always leave some headspace. This is because once it is frozen, the liquid will expand.
    • You can store your homemade fruit purée in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 38kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 114mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 9IU | Vitamin C: 44mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 1mg

    Easy Strawberry Vinaigrette Dressing

    June 9, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Light, sweet and refreshing, this easy strawberry vinaigrette salad dressing is the perfect complement to your summer salads. Preparation is quick and easy: all you have to do is mix the ingredients together in a blender, refrigerate until you're ready to serve and drizzle the vinaigrette over your salad.

    Strawberry vinaigrette in a jar with a spoon, fresh salad and tomatoes in the background.

    This dressing is cool and refreshing--just what you need for a hot summer day. You also can't go wrong with a strawberry crumble dessert for later on.

    It has that fresh strawberry flavor similar to my homemade strawberry purée but with a delicate balance of acidity, oiliness, sweetness, and seasoning.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Strawberry vinaigrette ingredients prepped and labeled.

    Just like a fresh salad, it's made from fresh ingredients without using vinegar.

    • strawberries - You can use store-bought strawberries, pick them at a berry farm, or try growing your own strawberries at home for an extra homemade touch. I like to use the ripest strawberries.
    • lemon juice - Freshly squeezed is best.
    • olive oil - Extra virgin olive oil is my favorite oil to use in a vinaigrette but you can use a more neutral oil like canola oil, if desired.
    • brown sugar - You can sweeten the dressing to taste.

    *See recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Strawberry Vinaigrette

    This fresh vinaigrette is ready in only 2 easy steps.

    Strawberry vinaigrette ingredients in blender.

    Step 1. Add ingredients. Add all of the ingredients to a blender or food processor.

    Strawberry vinaigrette ingredients blending in blender.

    Step 2. Blend. Blend until smooth and emulsified.

    Chef's Note: If you would like the dressing to be thicker, add some more fresh strawberries.

    Strawberry vinaigrette drizzling from spoon into jar.

    Top Tip

    Pour it over the salad right before you serve it for best results. No one wants a soggy salad.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Serve immediately or chilled. You can serve it right after you mix the ingredients in the blender, but it also tastes great if you chill it in the fridge for a while.
    • Serve with sweet and tangy salads. Since this homemade dressing has a sweet, fruity flavor, it pairs well with salads that have sweet and tangy ingredients like this watermelon salad with basil.
    • Serve it with salads containing cheese. Tangy cheeses like goat cheese and feta cheese add more flavor to your dish and pair well with the sweetness of the vinaigrette. You can add chopped nuts like pecans and almonds for an extra crunch.
    • Fruits that pair well with strawberry flavor (fresh or dried). Try your strawberry vinaigrette with salads that contain fruits like strawberries (that's an obvious one), mangoes, mandarin oranges, blackberries, blueberries, apples, cranberries, raspberries and other favorites on a bed of lettuce. A fruit salad would also work (check out how to make a fruit salad here).

    Recipes FAQs

    How do you store homemade vinaigrette?

    After you make your vinaigrette, make sure you store it in the fridge so that it stays fresh for up to 1 week.

    What is the most basic formula in making a salad vinaigrette?

    The typical base of a vinaigrette includes oil and vinegar or lemon juice at a ratio of 3:1.

    Strawberry vinaigrette drizzling from spoon into jar.

    🍓More Amazing Strawberry Recipes

    • Strawberry mojito mocktail pouring out of pitcher into glass with ice cubes.
      Strawberry Mojito Mocktail
    • Strawberry rhubarb sauce in stemless wine glass with spoon.
      Strawberry Rhubarb Sauce (Compote)
    • Strawberry orange compote in jar with spoon and toast on the side.
      Easy Homemade Strawberry Compote
    • Strawberry ice cream sundae with chocolate shavings in curved bowl.
      Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae

    Which 🥗 salad do you prefer to serve with this homemade vinaigrette? If you tried this 🍓 Strawberry Vinaigrette Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry vinaigrette dressing drizzling down spoon into small jar.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Strawberry Vinaigrette Dressing

    Light, sweet and refreshing, this easy strawberry vinaigrette salad dressing is the perfect complement to your summer salads. Preparation is quick and easy!
    Course Condiment, Salad, Sauce
    Cuisine American, French
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 ¼ cup servings
    Calories 147kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Food processor or blender

    Ingredients

    • ¼ cup lemon juice
    • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar or to taste
    • 2 cups strawberries cleaned, hulled and sliced
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper optional
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Blend all of the ingredients in a blender or food processor, until smooth.
    • Refrigerate dressing until ready to serve.

    Notes

    • Pour the vinaigrette over the salad right before you serve it for best results.
    • If you would like the dressing to be thicker, add some more fresh strawberries.
    • After you make your vinaigrette, make sure you store it in the fridge so that it stays fresh for up to one week.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 147kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 121mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 6IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 1mg

    Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae

    June 7, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This strawberry ice cream sundae recipe has just what you need to quell that frozen dessert craving. The homemade syrup is made in less time than it takes to head to the store and return with a premade, less delicious version.

    2 strawberry sundaes in dessert bowls with shaved chocolate and strawberries.

    Topped with whipped cream and dark chocolate shavings, it's the best combination of flavors for your sweet tooth. Have I caught your attention yet?

    Frozen desserts like this ice cream sundae are best for hot summer days, unlike my frozen grasshopper pie which is actually more of a spring dessert. You can duplicate this recipe to share with family and friends at a party or enjoy it alone from the comfort of your own kitchen.

    It's great for birthdays because you can make the syrup ahead of time, it's easy to assemble and you can make an ice cream bar where the kids can pick their toppings.

    This papaya ice cream and mochi ice cream balls are frozen treats that I think you'll like as well.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae Ingredients

    With only 5 ingredients, you will have yourself a delicious ice cream sundae with real strawberry syrup. I also use real strawberry syrup in my strawberry shortcake ice cream.

    Strawberry ice cream sundae ingredients labeled.
    • fresh strawberries - To make a homemade strawberry syrup plus more for topping. Choose the juiciest strawberries.
    • granulated sugar - To make the syrup.
    • vanilla ice-cream - I suggest a high quality vanilla ice cream since it's one of the stars of the dish.
    • dark chocolate - The chocolate will be shaved over the sundae to make it a little fancy.
    • whipped cream - The finishing touch to this sundae.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make a Strawberry Sundae

    For the Strawberry Syrup

    Strawberries and sugar in saucepan.

    Step 1. Combine the strawberries and sugar in a medium saucepan. Bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat.

    Strawberries and sugar simmering in saucepan.

    Step 2. Lower the heat and simmer until the liquid reduces a little, about 15 minutes.

    Strawberry sauce straining through fine mesh strainer.

    Step 3. Strain the liquid through a fine mesh strainer to remove the strawberries and then discard them. Let the sauce cool down.

    To Assemble the Sundae

    Strawberry ice cream sundae in dessert bowls.
    1. Pour and scoop. Pour 1 tablespoon strawberry syrup in the bottom of a dessert bowl. Add 1 scoop of vanilla ice cream.
    2. Repeat. Add 2 more tablespoons of strawberry syrup. Add 2 more scoops of ice cream.
    3. Top. Top with the whipped cream, strawberries, dark chocolate and a bit more of the strawberry syrup.
    4. Serve. Serve immediately! Refrigerate leftover strawberry syrup.

    Joss' Tips

    • You'll need 2 cups of strawberries to make the syrup, along with a few left over for topping purposes. A fine mesh strainer works best for the last step of syrup creation; however, if you don't own one, never fear! You can also use cheese cloth.
    • Of course, if you need to make this dessert in a pinch and you have strawberry syrup on hand, feel free to skip this step, but there is nothing quite like the homemade version!
    • National Strawberry Sundae Day is July 7th.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is a Strawberry Sundae made of?

    Strawberry sundaes are a simple combination of vanilla ice cream and chunky strawberry syrup plus optional toppings like chocolate and whipped cream.

    What are the origins of the sundae?

    Ithaca, New York is the birthplace of the cherry sundae and is named after the day it was created in 1892. Drizzled with cherry syrup and topped with candied cherries, it shot up in popularity quickly. While some recipes' shining star is the strawberry rather than the cherry, it is just as tasty.

    How do you store the leftover syrup?

    Leftover syrup should be refrigerated for later enjoyment. You can use it chilled or heat it back up on the stove to your desired temperature and use it for a variety of other treats including cheesecake, cake in a jar, waffles, fruity strawberry milk or even another strawberry sundae!

    2 strawberry sundaes in dessert bowls, strawberries and ice cream scoop on the side.

    🍓More Delicious Strawberry Recipes

    • Virgin frozen strawberry daiquiri in wine glass with strawberry-mint garnish.
      Virgin Frozen Strawberry Daiquiri
    • Strawberry parfait in stemmed glasses.
      Strawberry Parfait
    • Strawberry mojito mocktail pouring out of pitcher into glass with ice cubes.
      Strawberry Mojito Mocktail
    • Strawberry vinaigrette dressing drizzling down spoon into small jar.
      Easy Strawberry Vinaigrette Dressing

    Is this ice cream sundae your new favorite, homemade frozen dessert? If you tried this 🍓 Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry ice cream sundae with chocolate shavings in curved bowl.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae

    This strawberry ice cream sundae recipe with fresh strawberries, chocolate shavings and whipped cream has just what you need to quell that frozen dessert craving.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 1
    Calories 603kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Strawberry Syrup

    • 2 cups strawberries cleaned, hulled and chopped
    • ½ cup granulated sugar

    For the Sundae

    • 3 scoops vanilla ice-cream
    • 3 strawberries chopped
    • ½ tablespoon dark chocolate shaved
    • whipped cream to serve
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    Strawberry Syrup

    • Combine the strawberries and sugar in a medium saucepan. Heat the mixture over medium-high heat as you stir. The juices will start to release.
      2 cups strawberries, ½ cup granulated sugar
    • Bring this mixture to a boil. Lower the heat and simmer for 15 minutes.
    • Strain the liquid through a fine mesh strainer to remove the strawberries. Let the sauce cool down.

    To Assemble the Sundae

    • Pour 1 tablespoon strawberry syrup in the bottom of a dessert bowl. Add 1 scoop of vanilla ice cream.
    • Add 2 more tablespoons of strawberry syrup. Add 2 more scoops of ice cream.
    • Top with the whipped cream, strawberries, dark chocolate and a bit more of the strawberry syrup. Serve immediately!

    Notes

    • If you don't have a fine mesh strainer to strain the syrup, you can also use cheese cloth or a nut milk bag but it will take longer.
    • If you need to make this dessert in a pinch, you can use store-bought strawberry syrup, although homemade is best!
    • F.Y.I. National Strawberry Sundae Day is July 7th.
    • This recipe makes about ½ cup of strawberry syrup which is enough for 2 sundaes. Leftover syrup should be refrigerated for up to two weeks for later enjoyment. You can use it chilled or heat it back up on the stove to your desired temperature and use it for a variety of other treats.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 603kcal | Carbohydrates: 88g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 87mg | Sodium: 161mg | Potassium: 613mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 79g | Vitamin A: 849IU | Vitamin C: 65mg | Calcium: 276mg | Iron: 2mg

    Strawberry Liqueur

    June 2, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 8 Comments

    If you love the flavor of strawberries and want to experiment with making your own sweet alcoholic drink, this homemade strawberry liqueur recipe is for you. Infusing your own spirits is a fun activity from start to finish. Your friends and family will be impressed with your DIY skills; it makes a nice homemade gift as well!

    Strawberry liqueur in a jar, fresh strawberries on the side.

    The process of infusing from scratch does take some time, since the strawberries soak in vodka for 4-6 weeks for best flavor (with very little prep). You can strain it as early as a couple days of infusion but that amount of time doesn't cut it for me and I always go at least 4 weeks.

    This is a 'taste as you go' recipe. When you're satisfied with the flavor, continue to the straining step. However, it is worth the wait for its full, sweet, natural flavor.

    Since vodka is neutral in flavor, you will mainly taste the enhanced sweet and tart strawberry flavor, similar to the natural taste of my fresh strawberry juice, in a chilled glass bottle.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Strawberry liqueur ingredients prepped and labeled.

    All you need to make your own strawberry liqueur are the following ingredients and tools:

    • strawberries - cleaned and roughly chopped (you can use fresh strawberries or frozen strawberries that have been thawed)
    • sugar - white sugar will do
    • vodka - or white rum (I personally enjoy the vodka more than the rum!)

    As for tools, be sure to have a 1 quart jar and cheesecloth or a nut bag on hand.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Strawberry Liqueur

    Freshly chopped strawberries in a jar.

    Step 1: Add fruit to jar. Place the strawberries and sugar in a large (1 quart preferably) sealable glass jar.

    Vodka strawberry infusion in a jar.

    Step 2: Add alcohol. Fill the jar with the vodka or white rum. Seal and shake to mix.

    Vodka, strawberries and sugar in a closed jar.

    Step 3: Infuse. Let the mixture sit for 4 to 6 weeks in a cool, dark place for best flavor (you can check the flavor in as little as 2 days if you're in a pinch). Shake it a few times throughout the first day to help dissolve the sugar and then once every 2 days after that.

    Cheese cloth and strainer with strawberry liqueur running through it.

    Step 4: Strain. Strain the mixture through two layers of cheesecloth to make it clear. Discard the leftover fruit. Repeat, if needed, to get all of the solids strained out.

    ⭐Pro Tip: You can place the cheesecloth layers in a fine mesh strainer and over a deep pot or bowl. Let the liqueur drain through. Or, use a nut milk bag like I do with my pumpkin seed milk.

    Strawberry liqueur in a sealed jar, with fresh strawberries on the side.

    Step 5: Transfer to jars. Funnel the strained liquid into a glass bottle. Seal the bottle or jar. Store in the refrigerator to retain quality and freshness.

    Strawberry liqueur in a jar and wine glass, with fresh strawberry garnish.

    Step 6. Serve. Serve as desired.

    • Serve in glasses over ice.
    • Add some to a pitcher of lemonade (check out how to make lemonade here).
    • Add some club soda.
    • Make cocktails.

    Strawberry Liqueur Cocktails

    • Spicy Strawberry - a mixture of strawberry liqueur, tequila, lime cordial, lime juice and tabasco
    • Redwood - a mixture of strawberry liqueur, rum and bitters over ice
    • Neapolitan - a mixture of strawberry liqueur, chocolate-flavored vodka and soda
    • Strawberry Spritzer - add the liqueur to sparkling wine

    Straining Tips

    Cheesecloths are an interesting and useful tool, but they are not always accessible. If you cannot find or buy cheesecloths in your area, you can use different substitutes.

    • Cheesecloth is made of cotton, so clean cotton fabric with a rubber band will work as well. Choose a fabric you don't mind dirtying, because the strawberries will stain it.
    • A nut milk bag is fast, convenient and easy to wash/reusable.
    • I recommend a fine wire sieve because it's more common in the kitchen, its main use is straining, and it is easy to wash. It may not get the finest fruit particles and therefore the infusion won't last as long, so keep that in mind.
    • Or, if you want to be more creative, a clean coffee filter is another excellent choice for its filtering properties and most kitchens will have this on hand.

    Storage

    Since this is a homemade liqueur, it is best to refrigerate it to make it last longer. The better it is filtered, the longer it will last. You can tell it's gone bad if it has an off odor, flavor or appearance.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is strawberry liqueur?

    It is a spirit, such as vodka or white rum, that is sweetened and infused with strawberry flavor.

    Is there an alcohol made from strawberries?

    Fragoli is an Italian liqueur made from wild strawberries and actually contains whole strawberries in the bottle.

    Can you drink strawberry liqueur straight?

    Yes, you can drink it straight. I suggest serving it straight over ice cubes (on the rocks) for best results.

    Strawberry liqueur in a jar with fresh strawberries on the side on black serving board.

    ❤️More Strawberry Recipes You Will Love

    • Strawberry ice cream sundae with chocolate shavings in curved bowl.
      Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae
    • Strawberry champagne cake balls stacked on plate.
      Strawberry Champagne Cake Balls
    • Strawberry shortcake ice cream in martini glasses with syrup pouring out of spoon.
      Strawberry Shortcake Ice Cream
    • Homemade strawberry milk with straw in jar on cutting board.
      Homemade Strawberry Milk

    If you tried this 🍓 Strawberry Liqueur Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry liqueur in jar with fresh strawberries on the side.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Strawberry Liqueur

    This homemade strawberry liqueur recipe contains few ingredients but a whole lot of flavor. Infusing your own spirits is a fun activity from start to finish!
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 ¼ cup servings
    Calories 247kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 1 quart jar
    • cheesecloth
    • Liqueur bottle

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups strawberries cleaned and roughly chopped
    • 1 cup sugar
    • 2 cups vodka or white rum
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Place the strawberries and sugar in a large (1 quart) sealable glass jar.
      2 cups strawberries, 1 cup sugar
      Freshly chopped strawberries in a jar.
    • Fill the jar with the vodka or rum. Seal and shake to mix.
      2 cups vodka
      Vodka strawberry infusion in a jar.
    • Let the mixture sit for 4 to 6 weeks in a cool, dark place for best flavor (you can check the flavor in as little as 2 days if you're in a pinch). Shake it a few times throughout the first day to help dissolve the sugar and then once every 2 days after that.
      Vodka strawberry infusion in a jar.
    • Strain the mixture through two layers of cheesecloth to make it clear. Discard the leftover fruit. Repeat, if needed, to get all of the solids strained out.
      Cheese cloth and strainer with strawberry liqueur.
    • Funnel the strained liquid into a glass bottle. Seal the bottle or jar. Store in the refrigerator to retain quality and freshness.
      Strawberry liqueur in a jar, fresh strawberries on the side.

    Notes

    • Fresh or frozen strawberries: You can use fresh strawberries or frozen strawberries that have been thawed.
    • Flavor: This is a 'taste as you go' recipe. When you're satisfied with the flavor, continue to the straining step. I always let it sit for at least 4 weeks because anything under that doesn't cut it for me.
    • Storage: It should stay fresh in the refrigerator for about 2 weeks. You can tell it's gone bad if it has an off odor, flavor or appearance.
    • Straining tip: You can place the cheesecloth layers in a fine mesh strainer and over a deep pot or bowl. Let the liqueur drain through.
    • Serving suggestions:
      • Serve in glasses over ice.
      • Add some to a pitcher of lemonade.
      • Add some club soda or sparkling wine.
      • Make cocktails.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 247kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 56mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 27g | Vitamin A: 4IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 1mg

    Easy White Nacho Cheese Sauce

    May 28, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    This creamy, white nacho cheese sauce is ready in only 10 minutes! It's a perfect last minute snack that doesn't require any special ingredients. You don't need to rely on store-bought nacho cheese when you have this easy, tasty recipe that is just as velvety, smooth and delicious.

    White cheddar nacho cheese sauce in a coconut bowl on dark background, lily leaves on the side.

    Serve this white cheese sauce for nachos at all kinds of parties, game nights, New Year's Eve bashes and more.

    If you're using this queso blanco as a dip, keep it warm for your guests in a food warmer or fondue pot so that you can dip the night away. Include a variety of dippers (see below) to satisfy all tastes.

    If you can't get enough of cheese dip, like myself, you should also try this crockpot buffalo chicken dip, cheesy ground bison dip or kimchi cream cheese.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    White Nacho Cheese Sauce Ingredients

    White cheddar nacho cheese sauce ingredients labeled.

    I keep it simple in this sauce with 3 basic ingredients plus seasoning.

    • white cheddar cheese - Only use fresh cheddar, not pre-shredded, as this can make the cheese sauce grainy.
    • cornstarch - To thicken the sauce--no flour required.
    • evaporated milk - A concentrated form of milk that you will find in a can in the grocery store. It adds richness without the high amount of fat that cream has.
    • garlic powder - This enhances the flavor but feel free to omit.
    • milk - Optional - to thin the sauce.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Variations

    This is a basic recipe, open to variations if you want to get adventurous!

    • If you prefer nacho cheese with that deep orange color, you can use orange cheddar.
    • Experiment with your favorite melty cheeses (like Monterey Jack) or add some spices if you like it hot.
    • Add some beer to your cheese dip to make it a pub classic.

    How to Make White Cheese Sauce For Nachos

    Shredded white cheddar cheese in bowl.

    Step 1. Toss. Toss the shredded cheddar with the cornstarch in a bowl.

    Shredded white cheddar and evaporated milk in saucepan.

    Step 2. Melt the Cheese. Add the cheese and evaporated milk to a saucepan. Whisk over medium heat until combined. It should thicken and become smooth, about 5 minutes. Remove from heat.

    White nacho cheese sauce in saucepan with whisk.

    Step 3. Add Seasoning. Stir in the garlic powder and salt.

    White cheddar nacho cheese sauce in a bowl, with tortilla chips on the side.

    Step 4. Serve. Serve the white nacho cheese sauce immediately over nachos or as a dip with tortilla chips.

    Chef's Note: If you would like a thinner sauce, just add some milk (1 tablespoon at a time) until desired consistency.

    What to Eat With White Cheddar Nacho Cheese (Queso Blanco)

    Tortilla chips covered in white nacho cheese sauce on a purple plate, white wooden background.

    White nacho cheese is a versatile sauce that can be used with more than just regular nachos. If it's crunchy and edible, it probably tastes good with white sauce! Here are some of my suggestions:

    • Try it over these carne asada nachos.
    • You can use it as a dip for tortilla chips or other chips, taquitos, homemade toast points, raw vegetables, grilled pizza, chicken fingers, potato wedges, breadsticks, fries and pretzels.
    • Slather it over enchiladas, tacos, burritos, hot dogs, hamburgers, quesadillas (I have a delicious kimchi quesadillas recipe you could try), macaroni, etc.
    • A better question is what can't you put creamy cheese sauce on?

    Tips For a Smooth Cheese Sauce

    • Shred your own cheese.
    • Do not use high heat and avoid over-cooking. Once the cheese has melted, it's good to go.
    • Cornstarch helps to prevent the cheese from clumping.

    Recipe FAQs

    What white cheese is good for nachos?

    You can use a white cheddar with varying degrees of sharpness. Monterey Jack is another white cheese that is perfect for melting. If you like it spicy, you can use a Mexican blend.

    Can it be frozen?

    You can freeze it for up to 6 months, but make sure to cool it first and leave some room at the top of the container as it will expand when frozen. Thaw in the fridge.

    Is it gluten free?

    Yes, it's gluten free. It's thickened with cornstarch rather than flour.

    Storage & Reheating

    • If you have leftovers, you can refrigerate your cheese sauce in an airtight container for up to 3 or 4 days.
    • It does thicken when chilled, so be sure to reheat it in the microwave or over the stove on low when ready to serve again.
    • If you still find it too thick, adjust the consistency by stirring in some milk, a little bit at a time.
    White cheddar nacho cheese sauce over tortilla chips on plate.

    More Delicious Cheese Recipes

    • Kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches stacked on serving tray with skewer.
      Kimchi Grilled Cheese Sandwiches
    • Dill pickle cream cheese bagel spread on bagel and in small glass dish on cutting board.
      Dill Pickle Cream Cheese
    • Red wine cheese dip in mini slow cooker.
      Red Wine & Cheese Dip (for Mini Slow Cooker)
    • Melted brie cheese in cast iron pan.
      How to Bake Brie Cheese

    What is your favorite dipper for queso? If you tried this Easy White Nacho Cheese Sauce or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    White cheddar nacho cheese sauce in a coconut bowl, tortilla chips and lily leaves on the side.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Easy White Nacho Cheese Sauce

    This creamy, white cheddar nacho cheese sauce is ready in only 10 minutes! It's a perfect last minute snack that doesn't require any special ingredients.
    Course Sauce, Snack
    Cuisine Mexican
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 ¼ cup servings
    Calories 185kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 2 ½ cups white cheddar cheese shredded
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
    • 1 can evaporated milk 12 ounces
    • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
    • milk optional
    • salt to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Toss the shredded cheddar with the cornstarch in a bowl.
    • Add the cheese and evaporated milk to a saucepan. Whisk over medium heat until combined. It should thicken and become smooth, about 5 minutes. Remove from heat.
    • Stir in the garlic powder and salt. If you would like a thinner sauce, just add some milk (1 tablespoon at a time) until desired consistency.
    • Serve immediately as a dip with tortilla chips or over nachos, etc.

    Notes

    • Do not use high heat and avoid over-cooking. Once the cheese has melted, it's good to go.
    • Only use fresh cheddar, not pre-shredded, as this can make the cheese sauce grainy.
    • This should be served warm. Leftovers can be reheated.
    • If you have leftovers, you can refrigerate your cheese sauce in an airtight container for up to 3 or 4 days.
    • It does thicken when chilled, so be sure to reheat it in the microwave or over the stove on low when ready to serve again. If you still find it too thick, adjust the consistency by stirring in some milk, a little bit at a time.
    • You can freeze it for up to 6 months, but make sure to cool it first and leave some room at the top of the container as it will expand when frozen. Thaw in the fridge. Freezing might alter the texture.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 185kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 271mg | Potassium: 185mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 528IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 383mg | Iron: 1mg

    Electric Skillet Sloppy Joes

    May 26, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    Sloppy Joes are an American staple, and this electric skillet version has the same ease and tangy, savory flavor but you can make them wherever you can haul your electric skillet.

    Sloppy Joes on a serving dish.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Sloppy Joes Wherever You Go

    You can take your electric skillet along with you in the rv, camping, or anywhere there is an outlet to make these sloppy Joes. It's one of my favorite and easy electric skillet camping recipes.

    The bell pepper and onion give a subtle crunch. The tomato sauce has a good balance of tangy, savory and sweet with the ketchup, Worcestershire (wu-stuh-shr) sauce and brown sugar, and the toasted bun holds it all together in a messy but satisfying meal.

    If you're feeling extra adventurous, you can make your own ketchup from scratch for this classic American sandwich.

    This might sound odd, but once in a while, I like to drizzle a bit of this easy, white cheddar nacho cheese sauce on top of the sloppy Joes! Enjoy.

    Crowd Fave

    Recipe Review From Kerry B: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ "Just made this last night and loved it! Will make again (thank you)."

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    • bell peppers - Bell peppers start off as green. As they ripen, they turn into different colors and become sweeter, with red peppers being the sweetest. If you like the bitter contrast with the sweet tang of the tomato sauce, use the green pepper. If you prefer a sweeter pepper, I recommend the red pepper (it will also match the red tomato sauce, blending it in for those picky eaters).
    • ground beef - Use lean or extra lean ground beef for best results, especially if you are camping...then draining the grease is one less step you have to think about.
    • hamburger buns - Some of the best buns for sloppy Joes include brioche, potato buns, kaiser rolls, classic sesame seed and pretzel buns. You could even use a thick slice of Texas toast if you wanted to.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredients and amounts.

    How to Make Electric Skillet Sloppy Joes

    Sloppy Joes on a serving tray in women's hands with chips.
    1. In a medium bowl, whisk together the sauce ingredients and set aside.
    2. Heat a 12" electric skillet to 300°F. Brown the ground beef in the skillet, breaking it apart into crumbles as it cooks (about 5 minutes). Add the garlic, onions and bell peppers and cook for 2 more minutes.
    3. Stir in the ketchup mixture. Reduce heat to 250°F and simmer for about 10 minutes, until the mixture has thickened slightly.
    4. Toast the buns. Serve the sloppy Joe mixture over the toasted buns with some crispy chips on the side, if desired.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the origin of Sloppy Joes?

    They are debated to originate from either Cuba or USA. Sloppy Joes were popular in the 1930's, since they could feed a lot of people with the inexpensive meat, tomato sauce, onion and bread that made for a cheap, filling meal.

    How do you store the leftovers?

    Store leftovers in a covered container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    How do you reheat leftovers?

    Reheat the meat mixture in the electric skillet on medium heat or on the stove until hot.

    Sloppy Joes with chips on serving tray.

    More Electric Skillet Recipes You Will Love

    • Sausage sliced on a small cast iron tray.
      Electric Skillet Sausage
    • Creamy Tuscan chicken breast in skillet.
      Electric Skillet Creamy Tuscan Chicken
    • Full English breakfast on white plate.
      Electric Skillet Full English Breakfast
    • Butter chicken in a bowl.
      Electric Skillet Butter Chicken

    Did you get sloppy with your Sloppy Joes? If you tried this Electric Skillet Sloppy Joes Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Sloppy Joe with chips in the background.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Electric Skillet Sloppy Joes

    Sloppy Joes are an American staple, and this electric skillet version has the same ease and tangy, savory flavor but you can make them wherever you can haul your electric skillet.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 17 minutes minutes
    Total Time 27 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 374kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 12" Electric Skillet

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup ketchup
    • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
    • ⅓ cup water
    • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
    • 1 tablespoon brown sugar
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 pound lean ground beef
    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • ½ large yellow onion diced
    • ½ green bell pepper diced
    • 4 hamburger buns
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the ketchup, tomato paste, water, Worcestershire sauce, brown sugar, salt and pepper. Set aside.
      1 cup ketchup, 1 tablespoon tomato paste, ⅓ cup water, 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon brown sugar, ½ teaspoon salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • Heat a 12" electric skillet to 300 °F. Brown the ground beef in the skillet, breaking it apart into crumbles as it cooks (about 5 minutes)
      1 pound lean ground beef
    • Add the garlic, onions and bell peppers to the electric skillet and cook for 2 more minutes. Add the ketchup mixture. Mix well.
      2 cloves garlic, ½ large yellow onion, ½ green bell pepper
    • Reduce heat to 250 °F and simmer for about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally, until the mixture has thickened slightly.
    • Toast the buns. Serve the sloppy Joe mixture over the toasted buns.
      4 hamburger buns

    Notes

    • If you like the bitter contrast with the sweet tang of the tomato sauce, use the green pepper. If you prefer a sweeter pepper, I recommend the red pepper (it will also match the red tomato sauce, blending it in for those picky eaters).
    • Store leftovers in a covered container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Reheat the meat mixture in the electric skillet on medium heat or on the stove.
    • Optional: Serve with crispy chips on the side.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 374kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 30g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 70mg | Sodium: 1142mg | Potassium: 764mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 425IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 5mg

    Roasted White Asparagus

    May 19, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This roasted white asparagus recipe features fresh ingredients like pine nuts, capers and dill. It's the perfect, natural woodland dish that's accentuated by the vibrant hue of the white asparagus. Surprise your guests or family members by cooking something a little more unique for your next family dinner.

    Roasted white asparagus in serving dish with small yellow flowers on the side.

    This 20 minute side dish recipe cooks your white asparagus until it's tender, juicy and infused with the flavor of olive oil, capers and pine nuts.

    It is perfect as a vegan side dish option for Easter or anytime of year, but I also love to serve it with this lemon basil chicken pasta and spring sangria in the spring.

    The appearance might surprise your guests at first, but when they take a bite, they might find that they prefer it to the green variety.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    White Asparagus vs. Green

    Peeled white asparagus on cutting board.
    Fresh green asparagus on a wooden rack.

    How it's grown. So what's the difference between green and white asparagus? While green asparagus grows directly out of the ground, white asparagus grows underground like a root vegetable. As a result, this asparagus isn't exposed to the sunlight until it's harvested. It tends to be more expensive than green because of its shorter growing season.

    So why does it end up white vs. green? Asparagus requires sunlight exposure to produce chlorophyll and develop its characteristic green color. With no sunlight exposure, this asparagus stays pale and white while it grows in the soil.

    Flavor comparison. White asparagus has a lighter, sweeter flavor than the traditional green varieties--which have more of a grassy taste. While you can add it to dishes that require green asparagus, the white variety has a unique flavor that alters the taste and texture of your recipe.

    Ingredients

    Roasted white asparagus ingredients prepped and labeled on light grey background.
    • white asparagus - It tends to be thick and tough so you need to make sure you cut or break off the ends before cooking and peel the bottom two thirds of the spear. I will show you how below.
    • olive oil - Olive oil is a good choice to pair with white asparagus because it can counteract the bitterness.
    • capers - Capers add a little pop of tangy flavor to the finished dish. You will find them in a jar in the pickle aisle or international aisle of the grocery store.
    • pine nuts - Pine nuts are buttery and delicious because they have a high oil content. They taste amazing when roasted with the asparagus.
    • fresh dill - Make sure it is fresh and not dried. I have a tutorial for how to chop fresh dill that you might find helpful.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Cook White Asparagus

    Preheat oven to 425°F while you prep the asparagus. Make sure the asparagus is rinsed and patted dry before you begin.

    Prepare the Asparagus

    Collage of white asparagus getting peeled and ends chopped.

    Step 1. Chop the ends. Chop about 1" to 2" off of the ends of the asparagus. They are tough and we don't want to serve that part of the asparagus (Image 1).

    Step 2. Peel. Peel the outer layer of each asparagus spear because it is also tough and bitter. You only need to peel the bottom two-thirds. Now we are left with the most tender parts of the asparagus (Image 2).

    Roasting Steps

    Collage of white asparagus getting prepped for roasting on baking sheet.

    Step 3. Prepare baking sheet. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper (Image 3). Spread the asparagus out onto the baking sheet in one layer (Image 4).

    Step 4. Brush with oil. Brush the white asparagus generously with the olive oil. Season with salt and pepper (Image 5).

    Step 5. Add capers and nuts. Sprinkle the capers and pine nuts on top. Drizzle with the remaining olive oil (Image 6).

    Roasted white asparagus on baking sheet and dish with garnishes collage.

    Step 6. Roast. Roast for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until fork-tender and golden brown. Keep an eye on them (Image 7).

    Chef's Note: It will take longer for thicker asparagus pears. Use a fork to test for tenderness.

    Step 7. Garnish. Garnish with freshly chopped dill (Image 8).

    Roasted white asparagus on white dish with capers and dill and yellow flowers on the side.

    Step 8. Serve. Serve immediately and enjoy!

    Serving Suggestions

    • This roasted white asparagus recipe is the perfect, easy side dish for hearty dinners like poultry, ham, electric skillet pot roast and beef stew.
    • Try it with grilled proteins like steak, burgers and kimchi chicken.
    • If you like vegetables, you could make this asparagus the centerpiece of your meal.
    • It features vegan ingredients so it's suitable to serve with a vegan main dish.

    Roasted White Asparagus FAQs

    When is white asparagus in season?

    It has a short season, usually from April to June. If you can't find it in the local grocery store, check out farmers' markets.

    How do you know when it's done cooking?

    You can test the asparagus for doneness by inserting a fork into the stem; it should be tender but not mushy. You can also try snapping a spear in half; it should have a little snap to it but not be too crispy.

    How do you store the leftovers?

    Store leftover cooked asparagus in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 5 days. It can be frozen for up to 10 to 12 months.

    Roasted white asparagus on white dish with capers and dill.

    Related Main Dishes to Consider

    • Fried tofu on serving plate.
      How to Fry Tofu
    • Blackened chicken breast on plate with lime wedges and cilantro.
      Cajun Blackened Chicken Breast
    • Creamy tuna macaroni casserole in baking dish.
      Creamy Tuna Macaroni Casserole
    • Grilled bison ribeye steak sliced on cutting board with spices on the side.
      Grilled Bison Ribeye Steaks

    If you tried this Roasted White Asparagus Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Roasted white asparagus with capers and fresh dill.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Roasted White Asparagus

    This roasted white asparagus recipe features fresh ingredients like pine nuts, capers and dill. It's the perfect natural, woodland dish that's accentuated by the vibrant hue of the white asparagus.
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 174kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Baking sheet
    • Parchment paper

    Ingredients

    • 1 bunch white asparagus (about 15 to 20 spears) cleaned, ends removed and tough outer layer peeled
    • 3 tablespoons olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons capers drained
    • 3 tablespoons pine nuts
    • fresh dill chopped
    • salt and pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Heat oven to 425°F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Spread the asparagus out onto the sheet in one layer. Brush generously with the olive oil. Season with salt and pepper.
    • Sprinkle the capers and pine nuts on top. Drizzle with the remaining olive oil.
    • Roast for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until fork-tender and golden brown. Keep an eye on them. It will take longer for thicker spears.
    • Serve topped with fresh dill.

    Notes

    • Store leftover asparagus in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 5 days. It can be frozen for up to 10 to 12 months.
    • You can test the asparagus for doneness by inserting a fork into the stem; it should be tender but not mushy. You can also try snapping a spear in half; it should have a little snap to it but not be too crispy.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 174kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 169mg | Potassium: 282mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 868IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 3mg

    How to Cook Barley

    May 12, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    Barley has a nice, chewy texture and tastes mildly nutty when cooked. It's a great addition to soups or as a side dish to protein and vegetables. With this easy tutorial, you'll learn how to cook barley on its own, including pearled and hulled, and how to cook it in soup. If you're getting tired of rice, give this barley a try.

    Cooked pearl and hulled barley in bowls.

    The picture above shows cooked pearl barley on the left and cooked hulled barley on the right.

    Cooked barley can be used in a wide variety of dishes, from soups and stews to salads, risottos, and casseroles. Its chewy texture and nutty flavor complement many recipes.

    It can be enjoyed in both hot and cold dishes, making it a versatile grain for any meal or season.

    I also have tutorials for how to cook brown rice on the stove and how to fry tofu in a pan.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Difference Between Pearl and Hulled Barley

    Barley usually comes in two main forms: pearl barley and hulled barley.

    Hulled barely has everything but the outer hull, making it the healthier form of barley. It is darker in color in comparison to pearl barley. You'll get fiber and nutrients from the entire grain, not just the inner "pearls". The only downside is that hulled barley takes longer to cook.

    Pearled barley is a form of barley with the husks and shells (the bran) removed through a process called 'pearling'. It's still nutritious and cooks a little faster than hulled barley.

    Use pearl barley if: you're in a pinch, so you can cook the barley as soon as possible.

    Use hulled barley if: you want to get the full benefit of this whole grain.

    Pot Barley Vs. Hulled Barley

    There is another form of barley, called Pot Barley. Pot barley is somewhere in between pearl barley and hulled barley in terms of processing. It is also put through a pearling machine, but for a shorter amount of time, which keeps some of the bran intact.

    Ingredients

    Uncooked pearl and hulled barley in bowls.
    • pearl barley - You can also use hulled barley.
    • water - Or use broth for more flavor.
    • salt - Adjust to taste.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Cook Barley on Its Own

    With this method we are simply cooking barley on the stove.

    Uncooked barley in mesh strainer.

    Step 1: Rinse Barley. Rinse the barley with cool water in a mesh strainer.

    Uncooked barley in bowl and pot.

    Step 2: Add Ingredients to Saucepan. Add the barley, water (or broth) and salt to a saucepan.

    Barley cooking in pot.

    Step 3: Bring to Boil. Bring to a boil over high heat. Keep an eye on it, as it will start to foam up quickly once boiling.

    Cooked pearl barley in pot.

    (Pictured above: cooked pearl barley.)

    Step 4: Cook. When the water comes to a boil, lower the heat for a gentle simmer and cover. Pearl barley needs to cook for 25 minutes or more and hulled barley needs to cook longer, for 40 minutes or more.

    ⭐Pro Tip: Check for doneness and water level at the above times and every 5 minutes after. Simply add a bit more water or broth if needed.

    Cooked hulled barley in pot.

    (Pictured above: cooked hulled barley.)

    When it is done cooking, the barley will have expanded by 2-3 times in volume and have a nice and soft, chewy texture.

    Cooked pearl barley in pot and on spoon.

    Step 5: Rest. Take the pot off of the heat, keep covered, and let stand for 10 minutes. When the barley is done, you may need to drain some water (pearl barley will absorb more water than hulled). If a lot of water is remaining in the pot, simply drain it off.

    Cooked pearly barley in a bowl.

    Step 6: Fluff and serve. Fluff with a fork, season to taste (if needed) and serve!

    How to Cook Barley in Soup

    Pearl barley soup in bowl.

    If you want to give more heartiness and texture to your soup, add barley!

    For a Creamier Soup

    Barley in a mesh strainer.

    Step 1: Rinse. Begin by rinsing the pearl barley with cool water in a mesh strainer.

    Uncooked pearl barley in spoon over a pot of soup.

    Step 2: Add to Soup. Then, cook the barley with all of the soup ingredients, until soft. The pearl barley will release some starches and give the soup a thicker, creamier consistency.

    ⭐Pro Tip: I like to add about ½ cup dry barley to every 4 cups broth.

    Barley soup in a bowl and spoon.

    For a Lighter Soup

    Hulled barley in bowl over pot of soup.

    If you prefer a lighter, more clear soup:

    Just cook it separately using the above directions, rinse in a mesh strainer and then add it into the soup towards the end of cooking.

    Hulled barley soup.

    Ways to Serve Barley

    • If you enjoy whole grains, you can eat a bowl of cooked barley for breakfast or lunch.
    • Some people also use barley as a replacement for rice.
    • You can serve barley with meat and vegetables, add it to a fresh salad, make a soup or stew (I have a good kimchi stew recipe you might like), cook barley porridge or make a healthy grain bowl.
    • Serve it with this roasted white asparagus recipe.
    • Barley is great for meal planning in advance. Add a bed of cooked and cooled barley to your container, top it with meat and vegetables or this pea purée and store it in the fridge until you go to work the next day.
    • You could even make barley water (the water that is left after cooking barley) if you'd prefer to drink your whole grains.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is malted barley?

    It is barley that has been germinated in water and then heat-dried to halt the germination process from going any further. Malted barley is used to make beer, whisky, malt vinegar, etc.

    What does barley taste like?

    Cooked barley has a slightly nutty, mild taste and chewy texture.

    Where is barley in the grocery store?

    Barley is typically found in the baking aisle (near flour) or near other dried grains and legumes like rice, lentils and beans. If you can't find it there, you can try the bulk foods section. You can also find barley in health food stores.

    Where is barley grown?

    Some of the top places in the world where barley is grown are the EU, Russia, Australia, Ukraine and Canada. In the US, most of the barley is produced in Idaho, Montana and North Dakota.

    Is barley gluten free?

    Barley is not gluten free. It is one of three grains that contain gluten including barley, wheat and rye.

    Storage

    • Fridge: You can store cooked barley in a container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Freezer: It can be frozen for longer storage, making it easy to add to meals throughout the week.
    Cooked pearl and hulled barley in bowls.

    More Pro Cooking Tutorials to Try

    • Sliced garlic.
      How to Slice Garlic
    • Cabbage rolls stacked on plate.
      How to Make Cabbage Rolls
    • Corn nuggets on plate with dip.
      How to Make Corn Nuggets
    • Thanksgiving stuffing/dressing in white bowl with fresh herbs.
      How to Make Stuffing (From Scratch)

    What dish did you make with your new barley-cooking skills? If you tried this 📋 recipe tutorial for How to Cook Barley or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Cooked barley on a spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    How to Cook Barley

    With this easy tutorial, I will show you how to cook barley, including pearl and hulled, how long to cook it and how to cook it in soup or on its own.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine African, Middle Eastern
    Diet Low Salt
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 2
    Calories 326kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup pearl barley or hulled barley
    • 3 cups water or broth
    • 1 pinch salt
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Rinse the barley with cool water in a mesh strainer.
      Uncooked barley in mesh strainer.
    • Add the barley, water (or broth) and salt to a saucepan.
      Uncooked barley in bowl and pot.
    • Bring to a boil over high heat (keep an eye on it, as it will start to foam up quickly once boiling).
      Barley cooking in pot.
    • When the water comes to a boil, turn the heat to low for a gentle simmer and cover.
      Pearl barley needs to cook for 25 minutes or more and hulled barley needs to cook longer, for 40 minutes or more. Check for doneness and water level at these times and every 5 minutes after. Simply add a bit more water or broth if needed.
      When it is done cooking, the barley will have expanded by 2 to 3 times in volume and have a nice and soft, chewy texture.
      Cooked pearl barley in pot.
    • Take the pot off of the heat, keep covered, and let stand for 10 minutes. When the barley is done, you may need to drain some water (pearl barley will absorb more water than hulled). If a lot of water is remaining in the pot, simply drain it off.
      Cooked pearl barley in pot and on spoon.
    • Fluff with a fork, season to taste (if needed) and serve!
      Cooked pearl and hulled barley in bowls.

    How to Cook Pearl and Hulled Barley in Soup

    • If you want a creamier-textured soup: begin by rinsing the pearl barley with cool water in a mesh strainer. Then, cook the barley with all of the soup ingredients, until soft. The pearl barley will release some starches and give the soup a thicker, creamier consistency. I like to add about ½ cup dry barley to every 4 cups broth.
      Uncooked pearl barley in spoon over a pot of soup.
    • If you prefer a lighter soup: just cook the barley separately using the above directions, rinse in a mesh strainer and then add it into the soup towards the end of cooking.
      Hulled barley in bowl over pot of soup.

    Notes

    • You can store cooked barley in a container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • It can be frozen for longer storage, making it easy to add to meals throughout the week.
    • Hulled barely has everything but the outer hull, making it the healthier form of barley. It is darker in color in comparison to pearl barley.
    • Pearled barley is a form of barley with the husks and shells (the bran) removed through a process called 'pearling'. It's still nutritious and cooks a little faster than hulled barley.
    • Pot barley is somewhere in between pearl barley and hulled barley in terms of processing.
    • Barley is typically found in the baking aisle (near flour) or near other dried grains and legumes like rice, lentils and beans. If you can't find it there, you can try the bulk foods section. You can also find barley in health food stores.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 326kcal | Carbohydrates: 68g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 30mg | Potassium: 416mg | Fiber: 16g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 20IU | Calcium: 30mg | Iron: 3mg

    Homemade Strawberry Juice

    May 5, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 6 Comments

    This homemade strawberry juice is made with fresh ingredients, blended together to keep all of that nutritious goodness in the glass. The strawberries and small amount of sugar keeps the drink sweet, while the lemon juice gives it a slight tartness, perfectly balancing the flavors. No juicer is required to make this recipe.

    Strawberry juice in a glass jar, with a straw, lemon wedge and strawberry on the side.

    The other good thing about being made in a blender? This means less cleanup and less time spent before being able to sip on this refreshing beverage. I love the strawberry flavor that is just as fruity and tasty as my strawberry liqueur. It's naturally bright red in color.

    This drink is perfect for spring and summer and my kids don't mind replacing sugary, colored drinks for this fresh, fruity juice.

    If you're looking for more strawberry drinks, try this strawberry infused mojito mocktail and homemade strawberry milk drink.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    This recipe uses minimal ingredients and there is no juicing step. Just blend everything together and it's ready to drink! It makes a pitcher of juice but if you would like just one serving, divide the recipe by 4.

    Fresh strawberry juice ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • strawberries - fresh and ripe
    • sugar - or agave nectar
    • lemon juice - freshly squeezed--this gives it natural strawberry lemonade vibes
    • water - either tap water or filtered
    • ice cubes - to serve

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Tweaks

    • Strawberry Kiwi Flavor. For a fun variation, you could add some fresh kiwi to the blender as well. The combination reminds me of the strawberry kiwi Fruitopia I used to drink as a kid.
    • Turn it into a cocktail. Try adding some white rum to make it adult-fun-friendly.

    How to Make Strawberry Juice

    Strawberries and sugar in a blender jar.

    Step 1: Fill blender. Add the lemon juice, water, chopped strawberries and sugar to a blender.

    Blender jar with strawberry juice and an immersion blender.

    Step 2. Blend. Blend until you have a smooth consistency.

    Chef's Note: If you don't like pulp in your juice and would like it to be more clear, you can strain the juice through a fine mesh strainer. I prefer it with the pulp and so do my kids.

    Strawberry juice in a glass jar, with a straw, lemon wedge and strawberry on the side.

    Step 4: Serve. Pour into glasses over ice and serve!

    Strawberry Juice Benefits

    You might be thinking, is it good to drink strawberry juice? Strawberry juice, with all of its fiber, nutrients and antioxidants, can be a healthy and delicious drink. Try not to overload it with added sugar, though, or leave it out altogether.

    The strawberry juice benefits range from health to beauty. This information was gathered from Health Line:

    General Health: Strawberries are packed with antioxidants and fiber. The fiber comes from strawberry pulp, so if you want a health boost in your strawberry juice, I recommend keeping the pulp.

    Skin: As for beauty, the antioxidants and vitamin C in strawberries can help with skin inflammation and help to reduce age spots and wrinkles.

    Hair: The antioxidants, vitamins and minerals that strawberries are high in such as vitamin c, biotin and manganese, among others, may help to promote hair growth.

    Storage

    Store in the refrigerator for up to 3 days or freeze for up to 1 year. If you are freezing it, thaw in the refrigerator when ready.

    Does Strawberry Juice Stain?

    Does strawberry juice stain? Unfortunately, yes. Whether it is from the cut-up fruit or the finished drink, strawberry stains are difficult to wash off, especially when they don't react well to soap. Here are some steps to wash out stubborn strawberry stains:

    • First, blot (don't rub) the stain with a clean cloth or paper towel immediately.
    • Next, rinse any excess off with cool water (hot water can set some stains, so stick to cool water).
    • Mix 1 tablespoon of white vinegar and ⅔ cup of rubbing alcohol in a bowl.
    • Dip a cloth into the mixture and blot the stain until it is lifted.
    • Then throw it in the laundry using the hot water setting and detergent.

    Top Tips

    • Chill. Make sure the water is nice and chilled.
    • Sweetness. Adjust the sugar to taste or skip it all together for best results. As long as your strawberries are in season and sweet, this should be easy to do.
    • Strawberry season. Strawberries are at their sweetest and tastiest when they are in season. Spring is the best strawberry picking time but new varieties now extend the season into summer and fall.
    Strawberry juice in a glass jar, with a straw, lemon wedge and strawberry on the side.

    🍓More Delicious Strawberry Recipes

    • Virgin frozen strawberry daiquiri in wine glass with strawberry-mint garnish.
      Virgin Frozen Strawberry Daiquiri
    • Strawberry orange compote in jar with spoon and toast on the side.
      Easy Homemade Strawberry Compote
    • Strawberry rhubarb sauce in stemless wine glass with spoon.
      Strawberry Rhubarb Sauce (Compote)
    • Strawberry crumble in tart dish with vanilla ice cream and spoon.
      Easy Strawberry Crumble

    Do you love 🍓 strawberry season as much as I do? If you tried this Homemade Strawberry Juice Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry juice in a glass jar with a white straw on the side.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Homemade Strawberry Juice

    This homemade strawberry juice is made with fresh ingredients, blended together to keep all of that nutritious goodness in the glass. There is no juicer required.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt, Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 52kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Blender

    Ingredients

    • 1 teaspoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • 2 cups water
    • 2 cups strawberries cleaned, hulled and chopped
    • 2 tablespoons sugar or agave nectar or to taste
    • ice to serve
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add the lemon juice, water, chopped strawberries and sugar to a blender.
      1 teaspoon lemon juice, 2 cups water, 2 cups strawberries, 2 tablespoons sugar or agave nectar
    • Blend until you have a smooth consistency. (If you don't like pulp in your juice and would like it to be more clear, strain the juice through a fine mesh strainer.)
    • Pour into glasses over ice and serve!
      Strawberry juice in a glass jar, with a straw, lemon wedge and strawberry on the side.

    Notes

    • Make sure the water is nice and chilled.
    • This recipe makes a pitcher of juice but if you would like just one serving, divide the recipe by 4.
    • Adjust the sugar to taste or skip it all together for best results. As long as your strawberries are in season and sweet, this should be easy to do.
    • Strawberries are at they're sweetest and tastiest when they are in season. Spring is the best strawberry picking time but new varieties now extend the season into summer and fall.
    • Store in the refrigerator for up to 3 days or freeze for up to 1 year. If you are freezing it, thaw in the refrigerator when ready.
    • For a fun variation, you could add some fresh kiwi to the blender as well. The combination reminds me of the strawberry kiwi Fruitopia I used to drink as a kid.
    • Try adding some white rum to make it adult-fun-friendly.
    • Here are some steps to wash out stubborn strawberry stains:
      • First, blot (don't rub) the stain with a clean cloth or paper towel immediately.
      • Next, rinse any excess off with cool water (hot water can set some stains, so stick to cool water).
      • Mix 1 tablespoon of white vinegar and ⅔ cup of rubbing alcohol in a bowl. Dip a cloth into the mixture and blot the stain until it is lifted. Then throw it in the laundry using the hot water setting and detergent.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 52kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 7mg | Potassium: 112mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 9IU | Vitamin C: 43mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Make a Charcuterie Board

    May 5, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 7 Comments

    Learning how to make a charcuterie board at home will make you want to explore this culinary masterpiece. Elegantly simple, yet culinarily sophisticated. Filled with meat, bread, spreads, fruit, and other components, a charcuterie board offers you the opportunity to be creative in your choice of ingredients as well as with presentation.

    Circular charcuterie board with meat, cheese, breadsticks, nuts, apricots and olives.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is a Charcuterie Board?

    A charcuterie board is a platter filled with a variety of food items. The term charcuterie is a French term for a shop that sells preserved pork products. That is the main reason why cured meats, like salami, chorizo, and prosciutto, are a central part of the modern presentation.

    Often served as an appetizer or as a light meal for a casual gathering, a charcuterie board begins with selecting a range of ingredients for snacking on.

    What takes a charcuterie board to the next level are the additional components that expand the texture and flavor options. Think sweet, briny, spreadable, fresh. Each component adds another possible combination, texture, or flavor to the mix.

    Choose the Ingredients

    In this tutorial, I will teach you how to put together an expert charcuterie board yourself as well as show you all of the products we selected with the help of a restaurant that specializes in boards, called 'La Tabla'. The ingredients might look like they're just thrown together but all of the components are actually carefully selected and arranged.

    Circular charcuterie board with meat, cheese, breadsticks, nuts, apricots and olives.

    Step 1. Pick a Few Cheeses

    Cheese is a natural accompaniment to the salty, savory taste of cured meats and adds sophistication to the board.

    Mix up soft and hard varieties. You can go with a hard option like manchego or cheddar and add a soft, spreadable choice like brie or cream cheese.

    Soft ones give a silky creamy note while hard ones bring sharper flavors and textures. Think Brie, Havarti, Provolone, Mozzarella, Gouda, and Feta for starters.

    Brie cheese on wooden board.

    Brie cheese: soft and sweet.

    Goat cheese on wooden board.

    Goat cheese: strong flavor, mixed texture.

    Manchego cheese on wooden board.

    Manchego cheese: strong flavor, hard texture.

    Step 2. Breadsticks & Crackers

    Breadsticks on wooden board.

    Crackers are a key element of the board, as they are the vehicle for all of the delicious spreads and toppings.

    You can include several different types like mini breadsticks and a variety of crackers: whole grain, garden vegetable, water crackers, ritz, pretzels, etc. You can also include breads like skillet cornbread, focaccia, French bread and sourdough.

    Step 3. Something Acidic

    Black olives on wooden board.

    Go wild with your accompaniments. Olives are addictive for some, and will offer an acidic flavor that is hard to find on the board otherwise.

    Besides gourmet olives, feel free to pick a few more briny elements that add flavor and variety like pickled eggs, canned mussels, sliced dill pickles and capers. There are many more pickled items that you can choose from: asparagus, beans, pickled sausage, beets, anything pickled really.

    If you are adding focaccia to your board, you might want to include a high quality balsamic vinegar and olive oil for dipping.

    Step 4. Nuts

    Walnuts on wooden board.

    Nuts are especially good for holiday parties. They add some crunch, saltiness and blend well with the cheese. We used walnuts but you can go with almonds, cashews, peanuts, pecans, macadamia nuts, etc.

    Add a sweet touch with some candied nuts, which are especially great for holiday boards.

    Step 5. Something Sweet

    Apricots on wooden board.

    There is nothing better than dried apricots to bring a little sweetness to the board. Try picking a few sweet items: fresh grapes, berries, chutneys, marmalades and/or jams are more great options. If you're making a holiday board you could go with dried cranberries or oven-baked apple chips.

    Step 6. Charcuterie (Cold Cooked Meats)

    Think of meat as the heart of your board. Sliced meats like prosciutto and capicola are traditional as are cured meats like salami, pepperoni, and mortadella. Non-traditional options include smoked sausage, chorizo, souse, and summer sausage.

    Chorizo on wooden board.

    Chorizo (pork sausage): strong flavor

    Salami on wooden board.

    Salami: soft or medium flavor

    Prosciutto on wooden board.

    Prosciutto: salty and medium flavor

    Step 7. Savory Spreads

    Basil hummus with pine nuts in blue bowl, toast points on the side..

    Besides cheese, you will want to provide your guests with more options for spreading. Add spreads like pate, basil hummus or pumpkin dessert hummus, tapenade and stone ground mustard.

    Assemble The Charcuterie Board

    Circular charcuterie board with meat, cheese, breadsticks, nuts, apricots and olives.

    When assembling the board, start from the center. This will help you create a beautiful structure. Add containers for some of the elements; this will create additional shapes and separation between components.

    Joss' Tips

    Joss holding a charcuterie board.
    • There are no rules! Don't stress too much about your picks and placements--there are no rules when it comes to charcuterie boards!
    • Determine the size of board you will need for the amount of guests you are feeding. You can use several boards if needed.
    • When selecting your favorite ingredients, always remember to look for a balance in flavor. You can reach this balance by incorporating bitter ingredients (such as some of the charcuterie and cheeses) and sweet ingredients (such as fruits, jellies or chutneys).
    • Also look for a balance in textures: include hard cheeses and soft cheeses, crispy crackers and soft bread, etc.
    • Remember to add at least one knife for each type of cheese. Your guests will need something to spread their cheeses and jams with, so this is a crucial component.
    • Also provide your guests with forks and/or toothpicks so that they can easily grab items without getting their hands in there.
    • Be creative with your choices. Change it up for different holidays, choosing ingredients and garnishes that will match the holiday, in terms of color and taste. Here I make a 4th of July themed charcuterie board. Add seasonal decorations for Christmas such as rosemary and cinnamon sticks tied together with twine or dehydrated orange slices.
    • Don't mix wet and dry items or components like crackers will get soggy.
    • Make flowers out of meat: salami and prosciutto work well for this. You can also roll the meat into a log shape or fold it in half twice for an accordion effect.
    • Think of your guests. If you're serving to kids, be sure to include some kid-friendly options. Charcuterie is more about the company - eating is social!
    • Make it look full. After all, we eat with our eyes. You can stagger the cheese slices to add height, depth and spread them out a little.
    • Charcuterie on a budget: Buy bulk cheeses plus one special cheese. Bread and crackers are fairly inexpensive and you can even make your own. Use lots of fruits and vegetables as a filler. You can find inexpensive charcuterie meat packs to save money.

    Drink Pairing

    The beverages you serve with your charcuterie board add additional flavor and complexity. You can bring out a rich red wine like a Shiraz or go with a lighter white like Alsace Riesling.

    Offer a variety of craft beers ranging from a pale ale to a rich lager. Add non-alcoholic options like cider, herbal tea, hot chocolate, or lemonade (I have a great recipe tutorial for how to make delicious lemonade).

    How to Make a Charcuterie Board FAQs

    What is the 3-3-3 rule for charcuterie boards?

    This is a general rule that is especially great for charcuterie board newbies. If you don't know where to start, choose 3 of each: meat, cheese, bread components and accompaniments.

    How long can you store leftovers in the fridge?

    The amount of time you can store the charcuterie board ingredients in the fridge will depend on the ingredients used but I recommend no longer than 2 days. It is best to store each ingredient in separate containers. Breadsticks, nuts and dried fruit do not need to be refrigerated.

    How long can you keep the board out at room 🌡️ temperature ?

    For food safety reasons, your finished board shouldn't sit out for more than 2 hours.

    More Pro Cooking Tutorials to Consider

    • Cooked barley on a spoon.
      How to Cook Barley
    • Shepherd's pie with a slice missing.
      How to Make Shepherd's Pie (With Lamb)
    • Canadian butter tarts on Christmas themed plate.
      Canadian Butter Tarts
    • Thanksgiving stuffing/dressing in white bowl with fresh herbs.
      How to Make Stuffing (From Scratch)

    Are you ready to start creating a tasty charcuterie platter? If you tried this 📋 recipe tutorial for How to Make a Charcuterie Board or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Circular charcuterie board with meat, cheese, breadsticks, nuts, apricots and olives.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    How to Make a Charcuterie Board

    In this tutorial I will show you how to make an expertly curated charcuterie board at home. Filled with meat, bread, spreads, fruit, and other components, a charcuterie board offers you the opportunity to be creative in your choice of ingredients as well as with presentation.
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine French
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 1 board
    Calories 340kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Cheese board

    Ingredients

    • 3 or more cheeses brie, Camembert, goat cheese, Manchego, cheddar, Havarti, Provolone, mozzarella, Gouda, etc.
    • 1 breadsticks
    • 1 or more crackers whole wheat, ritz, water crackers, pretzels, flavored crackers, etc.
    • 1 bread cornbread, focaccia, sourdough, French, etc.
    • 1 olives
    • 1 nuts walnuts, pecans, macadamia, cashews, almonds, peanuts etc.
    • 1 dried fruit
    • 1 or more spreads hummus, pate, tapenade, stone ground mustard, jam, chutney, marmalade, etc.
    • 1 grapes or other fresh fruits and berries
    • 1 or more pickles dill pickles, pickled asparagus, beans, eggs, beets, etc.
    • 3 or more charcuterie chorizo, salami, prosciutto, ham, pepperoni, capicola, mortadella, souse, etc.

    Instructions

    • Cheese: Look for a balance in textures: include a variety of hard cheeses and soft cheeses. Brie cheese - soft and sweet. Goat cheese - strong flavor, mixed texture. Manchego cheese - strong flavor, hard texture.
      Manchego cheese on wooden board.
    • Breadsticks and crackers: Always remember to add bread or crackers to have with the cheeses and charcuterie. You can include several different types like mini breadsticks and a variety of crackers: whole grain, garden vegetable, water crackers, ritz, pretzels, etc. You can also include breads like Cornbread, focaccia, French bread and sourdough.
      Breadsticks on wooden board.
    • Acidic and pickled items: Olives, pickles, capers, pickled vegetables, canned mussels etc. will offer an acidic flavor that is hard to find on the board otherwise.
      Black olives on wooden board.
    • Nuts: Nuts are especially good for holiday parties. They add some crunch, saltiness and blend well with the cheese. We used walnuts but you can go with peanuts, pecans, macadamia nuts, etc. Add a sweet touch with some candied nuts, which are especially great for holiday boards.
      Walnuts on wooden board.
    • Something Sweet: There is nothing better than dried apricots to bring a little sweetness to the board. Try picking a few sweet items: fresh grapes, chutneys, marmalades and/or jams are more great options. If you're making a holiday board you could go with dried cranberries.
      Apricots on wooden board.
    • Charcuterie: Remember to include a variety of flavors: We used chorizo (pork sausage) for a strong flavor, salami for a soft or medium flavor, and Prosciutto for a salty and medium flavor.
      Prosciutto on wooden board.
    • Spreads: You can also add spreads such as hummus, tapenade, pate, stone ground mustard, etc. Mix it up and get creative with it!
      Basil hummus with pine nuts in blue bowl, toast points on the side..
    • Assemble: When assembling the board, start from the center. This will help you create a beautiful structure. Add containers for some of the elements; this will create additional shapes.
      Circular charcuterie board with meat, cheese, breadsticks, nuts, apricots and olives.

    Notes

    • Determine the size of board you will need for the amount of guests you are feeding. You can use several boards if needed.
    • Remember to add at least one knife for each type of cheese. Your guests will need something to spread their cheeses and jams with, so this is a crucial component.
    • Also provide your guests with forks and/or toothpicks so that they can easily grab items without getting their hands in there.
    • Think of your guests. If you're serving to kids, be sure to include some kid-friendly options. Charcuterie is more about the company - eating is social!
    • Make it look full. After all, we eat with our eyes. You can stagger the cheese slices to add height, depth and spread them out a little.
    • Charcuterie on a budget: buy bulk cheeses plus one special cheese, bread and crackers are fairly inexpensive and you can even make your own, use lots of fruits and vegetables as a filler, you can find inexpensive charcuterie meat packs to save money.
    • Drink Pairing: The beverages you serve with your charcuterie board add additional flavor and complexity. You can bring out a rich red wine like a Shiraz or go with a lighter white like Alsace Riesling. Offer a variety of craft beers ranging from a pale ale to a rich lager. Add non-alcoholic options like cider, herbal tea, hot chocolate, or lemonade.
    • Storage: The amount of time you can store the charcuterie board ingredients in the fridge will depend on the ingredients used but we recommend no longer than 2 days. It is best to store each ingredient in separate containers. Breadsticks and dried fruit do not need to be refrigerated.
       

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1g | Calories: 340kcal | Carbohydrates: 12.3g | Protein: 8.5g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11.1g | Cholesterol: 51.5mg | Sodium: 1114.4mg | Potassium: 110.3mg | Fiber: 1.5g | Sugar: 1.6g | Vitamin A: 611.6IU | Calcium: 155.3mg | Iron: 1.2mg

    Strawberry Shortcake Ice Cream

    April 28, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This homemade, no-churn, strawberry shortcake ice cream recipe will show the love with its classic creamy and fruity flavors.

    Strawberry shortcake ice cream in martini glasses with fresh strawberries in a bowl.

    There is no need for an ice cream machine; simply whip up some heavy cream with sweetened condensed milk, add some tart sweetness with fresh strawberries, and some good crunch with shortbread cookie chunks (just like I do with my strawberry shortcake pops).

    With strawberries coming into season and warm weather calling for cool, ice cream treats such as mochi ice cream and strawberry sundaes, this strawberry shortcake-themed ice cream makes for the perfect spring, summer or Mother's Day dessert.

    Mothers tend to love it when their children present them with something homemade for Mother's Day. With the fresh whipped cream, chopped strawberries and homemade strawberry sauce, it will be as sweet, natural, and cool as your mother is.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is the Difference Between Churn and No Churn Ice Cream?

    • The first difference is that it does not require an ice cream maker. Combining whipped cream with sweetened condensed milk and then freezing it, helps to achieve a similar texture and taste.
    • This recipe is basically a Philadelphia-style ice cream, meaning it has no eggs. Other recipes use eggs to prevent ice crystallization and make the texture creamy and smooth.
    • Ice cream maker recipes call for cooking the mixture while dissolving sugar into it for sweetening. This recipe does not involve a cooking step where sugar can be dissolved, therefore it uses sweetened condensed milk instead of granulated sugar.

    Ingredients

    Strawberry shortcake ice cream ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • fresh strawberries - The strawberries will be used in the strawberry sauce as well as an add-in and topping.
    • granulated sugar - For the strawberry sauce.
    • sweetened condensed milk - You will find it in a small can in the baking aisle at the supermarket.
    • heavy cream - Heavy whipping cream aerates the ice cream and adds flavor and creaminess just like in classic ice cream.
    • shortbread cookies - Shortbread cookies are similar to shortcake but without baking powder. They have a fine, crumbly texture and taste amazing in this ice cream.
    • whipped cream topping - You can use prepared whipped topping such as Cool Whip, canned or make homemade whipped topping. It's easy and only takes a few minutes.

    *See ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    How to Make it

    For the Strawberry Sauce

    Strawberry shortcake ice cream steps collage, making the syrup.

    Step #1. Bring to boil. Combine strawberries and sugar in a medium saucepan. Bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat (Image 1).

    Step #2. Simmer. Lower the heat and simmer until the liquid reduces a little, about 15 minutes (Image 2).

    Step #3. Strain. Strain the sauce through a fine mesh strainer. Discard the strawberries or reserve them for another use (Image 3).

    Step #4. Cool. Let the sauce cool down at room temperature. Meanwhile, place a 9"x5" loaf pan in the freezer to chill (Image 4).

    For the No-Churn Ice Cream

    Strawberry shortcake ice cream steps collage, making the no churn ice cream.

    Step #5. Combine. Combine the sweetened condensed milk with the vanilla extract in a large bowl (Image 5).

    Step #6. Whip. In a separate large bowl, whip the heavy cream with an electric mixer at medium speed, until stiff peaks form (Image 6).

    Step #7. Drizzle. Slowly drizzle the condensed milk mixture into the whipped cream and continue to whip on low speed until it is fully incorporated (Image 7).

    Step #8. Add-ins. Fold in the shortbread cookie chunks and diced strawberries (Image 8).

    Strawberry shortcake ice cream steps collage, assembling and freezing the ice cream.

    Step #9. Pour. Pour half of the ice cream mixture into the chilled loaf pan (Image 9).

    Step #10. Drizzle sauce. Drizzle 2 tablespoons of the strawberry sauce on top. Use a butter knife or chopstick to swirl the sauce around in the ice cream. Do not fully combine the sauce into the ice cream. Try to aim for streaks (Image 10).

    Step #11. Repeat. Add the remaining ice cream mixture to the pan. Drizzle another 2 tablespoons of strawberry sauce on top and swirl it through the ice cream with a butter knife again (Image 11).

    Chef's Note: You can reserve the rest of the strawberry sauce in the refrigerator until serving.

    Step #12. Freeze. Cover the pan with a piece of waxed paper or parchment paper and freeze for at least 6 hours, or until solid (Image 12).

    To Assemble

    Strawberry shortcake ice cream steps collage, serving the ice cream.

    Step #13. Thaw and scoop. Bring the ice cream out to thaw for about 5 minutes. Scoop the ice cream into dessert bowls or martini glasses (Image 13).

    Step #14. Serve. Top with whipped cream, crumbled shortbread cookies, strawberry slices and strawberry sauce. Serve (Image 14)!

    Serving Suggestions

    You can serve this ice cream in cones, bowls or martini glasses to get fancy. If you use clear glasses, you can see all of the delicious layers. Serving this dessert in martini glasses is especially great for Mother's Day!

    🍦I also have a crazy no churn ice cream flavor you might want to try: mac and cheese flavored ice cream.

    Pro Tip

    Empty loaf pan on pink background.

    While you may not need an ice cream-making machine to make this strawberry shortcake ice cream recipe, here is a tip to get the best results: I recommend chilling your bowls, loaf pan and beaters at least 15 minutes before beginning. The cold will help whip the ice cream better and freeze it quicker.

    Ways to Use up the Leftover Strawberry Sauce

    Strawberry syrup in bowl.

    Besides using it as a topping for your strawberry no churn ice cream, there are other ways to use up the leftover strawberry sauce including:

    • make strawberry milk
    • make a strawberry mint mojito mocktail that is perfect for a spring and summer refresher
    • drizzle it over strawberry parfait cups or strawberry cake balls
    • add it to homemade whipped heavy cream to add strawberry flavor to your topping
    Whipped cream in a bowl.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long can you store the ice cream?

    This ice cream can be stored in the freezer for several months, however, it will be at its best texture within a couple of weeks.

    Does strawberry shortcake ice cream have eggs?

    Because this is a no-churn ice cream, it does not contain any eggs.

    What is strawberry ice cream made of?

    This ice cream is made with real strawberries, including the sauce, for that genuine, sweet strawberry flavor.

    Strawberry shortcake ice cream in a loaf pan.

    ❤️More Strawberry Recipes You Will Love

    • Strawberry crumble in tart dish with vanilla ice cream and spoon.
      Easy Strawberry Crumble
    • Virgin frozen strawberry daiquiri in wine glass with strawberry-mint garnish.
      Virgin Frozen Strawberry Daiquiri
    • Strawberry liqueur in jar with fresh strawberries on the side.
      Strawberry Liqueur
    • Strawberry juice in a glass jar with a white straw on the side.
      Homemade Strawberry Juice

    If you tried this Strawberry Shortcake Ice Cream Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry shortcake ice cream in martini glasses with syrup pouring out of spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Strawberry Shortcake Ice Cream Recipe

    With strawberries coming into season and warm weather calling for cool treats, this strawberry shortcake ice cream makes for the perfect spring, summer or Mother's Day dessert.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American, British
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 6 hours hours
    Total Time 6 hours hours 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 6
    Calories 809kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 9" x 5" loaf pan
    • Saucepan
    • Fine mesh strainer
    • Electric mixer

    Ingredients

    For the Strawberry Sauce:

    • 2 cups strawberries cleaned, hulled and chopped
    • ½ cup granulated sugar

    For the No-Churn Ice Cream:

    • 14 ounces sweetened condensed milk
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 2 cups heavy cream
    • 1 cup shortbread cookies broken into chunks
    • 1 cup strawberries diced
    • ¼ cup strawberry sauce (from above) divided

    Toppings:

    • whipped cream topping
    • crumbled shortbread cookies
    • sliced strawberries
    • strawberry sauce
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Strawberry Sauce:

    • Combine strawberries and sugar in a medium saucepan. Bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat.
    • Lower the heat and simmer until the liquid reduces a little, about 15 minutes.
    • Strain the sauce through a fine mesh strainer. Discard the strawberries. Let the sauce cool down at room temperature.

    For the No-Churn Ice Cream:

    • Place a 9"x5" loaf pan in the freezer to chill. Combine the sweetened condensed milk with the vanilla extract in a large bowl.
    • In a separate large bowl, whip the heavy cream with an electric mixer at medium speed, until stiff peaks form.
    • Slowly drizzle the condensed milk mixture into the whipped cream and continue to whip on low speed until it is fully incorporated.
    • Fold in the shortbread cookie chunks and diced strawberries.
    • Pour half of the ice cream mixture into the chilled loaf pan.
    • Drizzle 2 tablespoons of the strawberry sauce on top. Use a butter knife or chopstick to swirl the sauce around in the ice cream. Do not fully combine the sauce into the ice cream. Try to aim for streaks.
    • Add the remaining ice cream mixture to the pan. Drizzle another 2 tablespoons of strawberry sauce on top and swirl it through the ice cream with a butter knife again. (Reserve the rest of the strawberry sauce in the refrigerator until serving.)
    • Cover the pan with a piece of waxed paper and freeze for at least 6 hours, or until solid.

    To Assemble:

    • Bring the ice cream out to thaw for about 5 minutes. Scoop the ice cream into dessert bowls or martini glasses.
    • Top with whipped cream, crumbled shortbread cookies, strawberry slices and strawberry sauce.
    • Serve!

    Video

    Notes

    • This recipe makes about 1 cup strawberry sauce.
    • I recommend chilling your bowls, loaf pan and beaters at least 15 minutes before beginning. The cold will help whip the ice cream better and freeze it quicker.
    • You can serve this ice cream in cones, bowls or martini glasses to get fancy. If you use clear glasses, you can see all of the delicious layers. Serving this dessert in martini glasses is especially great for Mother's Day!
    • This ice cream can be stored in the freezer for several months, however, it will be at its best texture within a couple of weeks.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 809kcal | Carbohydrates: 95g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 45g | Saturated Fat: 24g | Cholesterol: 139mg | Sodium: 325mg | Potassium: 455mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 66g | Vitamin A: 1387IU | Vitamin C: 43mg | Calcium: 265mg | Iron: 2mg

    Sweet Pea Purée

    April 21, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    This sweet pea purée is a vibrantly green side dish that makes the perfect addition to your next dinner party or family dinner.

    The purée might look a little like baby food, but don't be fooled--this is a tasty adult side dish that's enhanced with butter, broth, heavy cream and seasoning. It's easy to make and ready in only 15 minutes.

    Pea purée in a white bowl on wooden plate, with green peas on the side.

    It's especially good with bacon-wrapped scallops, salmon and creamy pasta or gnocchi dishes. I always serve it with my creamy, cheesy gnocchi. The flavors complement each other perfectly.

    Some people refuse to eat peas or complain when they find a green pea mixed in with their food (me as a kid). Those people don't realize that the world of vegetables goes well beyond cold canned peas in the supermarket.

    The flavors in this purée combined create an easy and delicious side dish that's nothing like the peas you used to eat at elementary school.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🫛Pea Purée Ingredients

    This recipe yields approximately 1 ¼ cups purée.

    Pea puree ingredients prepped on wooden background.
    • onions - Yellow onions are best for cooking.
    • chicken broth - I use reduced sodium chicken broth.
    • heavy cream - Also known as heavy whipping cream.
    • frozen peas - Sweet peas provide the best flavor! They are also known as garden peas or English peas. The ones I buy are labeled 'sweetlets' and are picked and flash frozen when they are young to retain their sweetness. You can also find them at farmers' markets beginning in the spring.
    • lemon zest - Freshly zested--this adds such a nice pop of flavor to the purée.
    • extra virgin olive oil (not pictured) - Choose a high quality EVOO to finish off the purée. This is optional.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    💭Pro Tip: The smaller the pot, the better. The peas become better submerged in the liquid and cook more evenly.

    🔪How to Make it

    Butter melting in pot.

    Step 1. Melt the butter. Heat a small saucepan over medium-high heat and melt the butter in it.

    Onions cooking in pot.

    Step 2. Cook the onions. Add the onions and cook until soft, about 5 minutes, stirring frequently.

    Peas, onions and cream mixture cooking in pot.

    Step 3. Simmer. Add the broth, cream and peas and bring to a boil. Lower the heat and simmer until soft (about 5 minutes). Remove from heat and let cool slightly.

    Pea purée in saucepan with lemon zest, salt and pepper.

    Step 4. Purée and season. Purée the pea mixture in a blender or food processor. Return to the saucepan and stir in the lemon zest. Season with salt and pepper, to taste. Warm it back up over medium heat, if needed.

    Pea purée in a white bowl on wooden plate, with a spoon on the side

    Step 5. Serve. Transfer to a serving dish. Drizzle with olive oil (optional) and serve.

    🥗Serving Suggestions

    When it's time to serve this purée, the bright green color offers a world of possibilities.

    • You can garnish your purée with herbs like mint or add a swirl of olive oil.
    • If you love the taste of sweet peas, this recipe makes the perfect, enticing side dish for your next dinner party or family dinner.
    • You could also use this purée as a sauce or top it with a protein like lamb, steak (try my tutorial for how to grill carne asada for an amazing steak recipe) or seafood like scallops or crispy skin salmon. If you're using it as a sauce or a garnish on its own, the brilliant green hue brings out the redness of the steak and the bright colors of the vegetables.
    • Up your plating game by artfully smearing it on a plate before topping it with the protein.
    • Try it with oven-baked potatoes, cheesy pasta or creamy gnocchi to balance out the flavors. Whatever you choose, it'll help bring your food presentation to fine-dining quality.
    • End your dinner on a sweet note with this strawberry shortcake ice cream.

    ❓Recipe FAQs

    Do you serve pea purée hot or cold?

    Serve your pea purée as a side dish while it's still warm for best results.

    How long does pea purée last?

    This dish is best served immediately, but if you're planning ahead, you can store it in the fridge for up to 3 days or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Just make sure you use an airtight container and heat it up again to bring out all of the delicious, savory flavors.

    Can you refreeze frozen pea purée?

    According to University of Minnesota Extension, you can refreeze frozen, cooked foods but the quality will be downgraded. It must have been kept cold for no more than 3-4 days and left out of the fridge for no more than 2 hours.

    Pea purée in a white bowl on wooden plate, with a spoon on the side and green peas in the background.

    ❤️More Side Dish Recipes You Will Love

    • Chickpea and salmon salad in bowl with lemon slices.
      Easy Chickpea Salmon Salad
    • Roasted white asparagus with capers and fresh dill.
      Roasted White Asparagus
    • Kimchi bacon fried rice on a plate on brown background.
      Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice
    • Pierogies with cheese filling on blue plate.
      Easy Pierogies

    Have you turned the picky eaters in your life into vegetable lovers? If you tried this 🫛 Sweet Pea Purée Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Pea purée in a white bowl on wooden plate, with a spoon on the side
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Sweet Pea Purée Recipe

    This sweet pea purée is a vibrantly green dish that makes the perfect addition to your next dinner party or family dinner. It's especially good with scallops, salmon and creamy pasta or gnocchi dishes.
    Course Sauce, Side Dish
    Cuisine American, British
    Diet Low Salt
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 158kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Blender
    • Saucepan

    Ingredients

    • 2 tablespoons butter
    • ½ cup yellow onions chopped
    • ¼ cup chicken broth
    • ¼ cup heavy cream
    • 1 ½ cups frozen peas sweet peas are best
    • 1 ½ teaspoons lemon zest freshly zested
    • salt and pepper to taste
    • extra-virgin olive oil for drizzling on the finished purée (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Heat a small saucepan over medium-high heat and melt the butter in it.
      2 tablespoons butter
    • Add the onions and cook until soft, about 5 minutes, stirring frequently.
      ½ cup yellow onions
    • Add the broth, cream and peas and bring to a boil. Lower the heat and simmer until soft (about 5 minutes). Remove from heat and let cool slightly.
      ¼ cup chicken broth, ¼ cup heavy cream, 1 ½ cups frozen peas
    • Purée the pea mixture in a blender or food processor. Return to the saucepan and stir in the lemon zest. Season with salt and pepper, to taste. Warm it back up over medium heat, if needed.
      1 ½ teaspoons lemon zest
    • Transfer to a serving dish. Drizzle with olive oil (optional) and serve.

    Notes

    • This recipe yields approximately 1 ¼ cups purée.
    • The smaller the pot, the better. The peas become better submerged in the liquid and cook more evenly.
    • This dish is best served immediately, but if you're planning ahead, you can store it in the fridge for up to 3 days or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Just make sure you reheat it first.
    • It's a great accompaniment to scallops, steak, salmon, potatoes, creamy pasta and gnocchi.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 158kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 116mg | Potassium: 190mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 821IU | Vitamin C: 27mg | Calcium: 33mg | Iron: 1mg

    The Best Stainless Steel Electric Skillet (Top Picks)

    April 19, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Some electric skillets have more functionality than others do, but they all have that unique electric skillet feature that will add to your cooking experience. Electric skillets come in several different materials; stainless steel being one of them. Here are a few tips and reviews to help you find the best stainless steel electric skillet for your home.

    Stainless steel electric skillet isolated on white background.

    Offering diverse applications, electric frying pans have become an important part of many homes. With this device, you can cook everyday meals with the same or less effort traditional cooking methods take, not to mention use less energy doing so.

    You can use an electric frying pan for a wide range of cooking types including baking, sautéing, and frying. Some of my favorite things to make are this electric skillet fried chicken, skillet pot roast and electric skillet pork chops.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Stainless Steel Electric Skillet Comparison Table

    ModelFeatures
    Cucina Pro Round 18/10 Stainless Steel
    Cucina Pro Stainless Steel Electric Skillet
    CHECK PRICE ➜
    Size: 12" and 16"
    Temp. Range: 200°F to 400°F
    Dishwasher Safe: Yes (excluding temperature dial)
    Watts: 1500
    All Clad Non-Stick
    All Clad stainless steel electric skillet.
    CHECK PRICE ➜
    Size: 14"
    Temp. Range: 250°F to 450°F
    Dishwasher Safe: Yes (excluding temperature dial)
    Watts: 1800
    Cuisinart CSK-150 Non-stick Interior
    Cuisinart CSK-150 stainless steel electric frying pan
    CHECK PRICE ➜
    Size: 12" x 15"
    Temp. Range: 250°F to 450°F
    Dishwasher Safe: Yes (excluding temperature dial)
    Watts: 1500

    How Does a Stainless Steel Electric Frying Pan Differ from Other Types?

    The difference with stainless steel pans is simply the material. They all have similar functions and features, however the material does change some of the ways in which you will take care of your skillet, as well as durability.

    Functioning more or less like an oven and frying pan together, all electric skillets are connected to an outlet which will heat the pan's surface. The temperature of the pan is controlled using a thermostat.

    Cucina Pro Stainless Steel Electric Skillet with food in it.
    clean and dry electric skillet image

    The biggest areas where stainless steel electric skillets differ from other types are their durability and non-stick qualities. Many electric skillets have a non-stick surface, such as ceramic and teflon. Regular stainless steel pans do not have a non-stick surface, so you may need to use more oil and preheat in order to avoid sticking. Despite this, if cooked with properly, you shouldn't have a problem with clean-up.

    However, you can find some steel models with an added non-stick surface if that's important to you. Although it isn't required, you may want to season your stainless steel pan, which I go over below.

    ⭐ I have also reviewed the best ceramic electric skillets if you're interested.

    Stainless steel electric pans can take a lot more heat than the other materials, making them more durable. They are great for high-heat cooking such as searing, browning and stir-frying. Another difference is that you can use metal utensils without the fear of scratching the surface, or dealing with peeling. All of this means you will not have to replace your steel pan as often as a non-stick one.

    Features & Benefits

    Size

    Available in several sizes, electric frying pans typically range from 12 to 16-inches with the 16-inch option being preferable for cooking larger amounts of food. If you are cooking for a large family or a potluck, you don't want to buy the smaller size and regret not having the larger size later. It's better to buy the larger size for a few more dollars and have that larger skillet on hand in case you need it.

    The only downside I have come across with the larger skillets is: if you need to simmer liquid, this happens quicker due to the larger surface area and you may have to cut the simmering time down a bit to compensate for that. Keep an eye on the liquid.

    A 12" skillet will work great for most electric frying pan recipes, unless you are doubling or tripling the recipe. It's perfect for about 4 servings or less.

    Shape

    The three most common shaped electric skillets are the rectangular, circular and square skillets. Don't focus so much on the shape when choosing one, but rather think about the needs of your family.

    • Larger families will need the room of the rectangular size since it gives you more surface area.
    • The smaller oval and square shapes are a better choice for smaller families.
    • The circular shape would be best for baking pizza in the electric frying pan, since they have the same shape.

    Materials

    Stainless steel is a durable option that comes in different grades and will give you a long-lasting skillet. The s.s. frying pans are typically 18/10 (304 Grade) which is top quality industry standards and simply means they are made from about 18% chromium and 10% nickel.

    Remember though, that stainless steel surfaces are not naturally a non-stick cooking surface like other non-stick pans, so you will need to use oil to ensure your food doesn't stick to the pan or go for the non-stick coated models.

    Easy Operation

    Typically, an electric frying pan has a plug-and-play design. Once the skillet has reached your desired temperature it will function as a regular frying pan. Just remember that the electric skill is thermostatically controlled and once it's reached that temperature, it can drop a few degrees before it kicks back in and restores the heat. This won't hurt your meal since the change is barely noticeable.

    Cleaning

    cleaning sponge

    Typically, there are some electric skillets that do have a dishwasher-safe part, although there are a few models that don't. Follow the user manual for cleaning instructions and get some cleaning tips from this tutorial for how to clean an electric skillet.

    You will need to remove the temperature gauge and/or other parts before cleaning. Different models may have different cleaning requirements, so be sure to read the cleaning instructions in the manual for your particular skillet.

    Design

    If you use your skillet as a server or on display, you will probably want it to look nice and stylish. Look for any additional features such as color choices, pouring spouts and steam vents, etc. These can vary slightly from model to model.

    Versatility

    An electric frying pan is super versatile and allows you to cook in a variety of different ways. You can grill, sauté, stir fry, steam, bake and fry all different types of foods. It's also pretty portable, so even if you go on vacation or to your cabin in the woods, it's a great tool to take along with you.

    Pretty much anywhere you can plug the skillet in, you can make a great meal. Check out how to use an electric skillet for more details.

    Temperature Control

    Cucina Pro Stainless Steel Electric Skillet Temperature Probe

    It's important to remember that an electric frying pan is not like a regular frying pan or a typical skillet. It isn't heated over the stovetop, but instead tries to maintain the heat you set it at with a dial. Look at the temperature range that each skillet has and whether the dial has numbers or text ('low', 'medium', 'high').

    Lid

    All Clad stainless steel electric skillet.

    Typically, a stainless-steel electric skillet will come with either a glass or stainless-steel lid. If you are interested in a lid that has a great moisture-locking system, then opt for a skillet that has a stainless-steel lid. If you like to see how your food is cooking, then a glass lid will allow you to view your food easily while still providing your food with lots of taste. Some lids have steam vents to prevent liquids from boiling-over.

    Handles

    Cuisinart CSK-150 stainless steel electric frying pan handles

    Handles and knobs on your electric skillet tend to get hot, no matter what type of material they are made of. If you don't want to deal with using oven mitts frequently, try to look for a stainless steel electric skillet that has stay-cool handles, which help keep you safe from the heat. Most models do have this feature, but not all. It is less common with stainless steel electric pans.

    How to Season a Stainless Steel Electric Skillet

    Seasoning a stainless steel electric frying pan is not necessary, but many people do this in hopes that clean up will be easier after cooking.

    • First, wash the pan with warm water and a mild dish detergent. After you clean the exterior and interior, rinse the pan and dry completely.
    • Next, coat the inside of the pan using a layer of oil. Use oil that has a high smoke point like a peanut oil.
    • Heat the pan to medium heat using the temperature dial. Let the skillet heat until the oil starts to smoke lightly and then turn off the heat.
    • Let the skillet cool down until you can handle it. Wipe out the extra oil with a clean paper towel.
    • That's it! Your pan is now seasoned.

    Always wipe up the oil in the cooled skillet with paper towels after you use it. If you do need to wash the pan with soap, then you can re-season it before you use it next.

    Top 3 Stainless Steel Electric Skillet Reviews

    1. Stainless Steel Electric Skillet By Cucina Pro

    Cucina Pro Stainless Steel Electric Skillet

    Made with 18/10 stainless steel, the 1500 watt electric frying pan by Cucina Pro is a 12" round skillet that comes with a tempered glass lid. It also comes in a 16" size. Large enough to cook a meal for a family of four with the 12" or more with the 16", this skillet heats the interior evenly. Featuring durable construction, this polished stainless-steel skillet will last you many years.

    Cucina Pro Stainless Steel Electric Skillet Temperature Probe

    Locking in heat, the tempered glass lid allows you to see the food cooking on the inside without having to remove the lid and release heat. The handles are attached securely with rivets that make them safe to use. You also get a temperature probe that ranges from 200°F to 400°F with a 'keep warm' setting. When the skillet reaches the desired temperature, an indicator light will go off.

    Perfect for making an omelet or grilling and sautéing food, the Cucina Pro cooks quickly and evenly. It has a highly polished surface to help avoiding sticking. The manual includes some recipes for you to begin with. You can clean this skillet by wiping it out with a damp towel or hand washing it. The base is dishwasher safe.

    PROS

    • This skillet is easy to clean as it is highly polished to avoid sticking.
    • Pan base is immersible and dishwasher safe.
    • This durable skillet will last you a long time.
    • Comes in two sizes.
    • 3" deep.

    CONS

    • Some users say it needs to be deeper.

    The Cucina Pro is great for consumers looking for a quality skillet with size options, easy cleaning and good value for the price.

    BUY HERE

    2. All Clad Nonstick Round (1800 Watt)

    All Clad stainless steel electric skillet.

    Made of bonded metal, the 1800 Watt All Clad non-stick frying pan is a great mix of electric convenience and even heat distribution. With the deepness of this skillet you can braise beef, brown, griddle, pan-fry, simmer, and stir fry. Easily use this for your daily meals or use it to entertain, especially if you need an extra element.

    This multi-tasking skillet with Eterna® non-stick coating includes an adjustable temperature control with settings ranging between 250°F and 450°F, which is on the higher end. Easily adjust the knob to accommodate whether you want to sauté, braise, or simmer. It also has an indicator light to let you know when it has heated to the desired temperature.

    It can hold 7 quarts and includes a clear lid plus easy to control temperature dial. The dial also has a sear and warm option, which I find comes in handy.

    The company also states that the cooking insert (minus plugs and cords) is safe to use in an oven or broiler, up to 600°F, which is unique for an electric frying pan.

    Pros

    • The dial has a sear and warm option.
    • Non-stick capabilities.
    • It's temperature reaches 450°F, higher than some other models reviewed
    • Dishwasher safe.
    • Broiler and oven safe insert.

    Cons

    • The round shape might not appeal to everyone.
    • Not everyone wants a non-stick coating on their pan and might prefer full stainless steel.
    • High price point.

    The All Clad is great for consumers who need a quality skillet that can reach a temperature higher than 400°F who prefer a dishwasher-friendly model for easy cleaning.

    BUY HERE

    3. Cuisinart CSK-150 1500-Watt Nonstick Oval Electric Skillet

    Cuisinart CSK-150 stainless steel electric frying pan

    This 1500 watt stainless steel electric skillet differs from the other models in that its surface has a BPA free nonstick coating, but is housed in brushed stainless steel. So you won't be cooking directly on the stainless steel and you shouldn't use metal utensils on it.

    Cuisinart CSK-150 stainless steel electric frying pan surface

    This skillet is 12" x 15" and has a temperature probe with a range from warm to 450°F; the highest temperature out of the models reviewed here. The lid is tempered glass with a steam vent and stainless steel rim/handle. The manual comes with many recipes.

    The non-stick surface makes this pan very easy to clean. It is fully immersible and you can put it in the dishwasher (with the temperature probe removed first).

    Pros

    • Dishwasher safe.
    • Non-stick interior surface.
    • Tempered glass lid.
    • High temperature range.
    • 3 year limited warranty.

    Cons

    • This is not the skillet for you if you're wanting to cook directly on stainless steel.
    • Higher price point.
    • Some user complaints about the heating element failing after a few uses.

    The Cuisinart CSK-150 is great for consumers looking for the stainless steel look, but with the non-stick cooking surface.

    BUY HERE

    Conclusion

    It can look easy to choose the best stainless steel electric skillet, but it's important to consider which skillet has the best size, shape, and features for your needs. It's also important to do your research and find the most effective and reliable skillet on the market that is going to satisfy your cooking needs.

    An electric frying pan will easily become a commonly used appliance in your kitchen or rv/camper, so you want to make sure you have a durable and easy-to-maintain product at a decent price point.

    Our top pick out of the three would be the Cucina Pro Stainless Steel for it's well-rounded features and functionality. The fact that it comes in 2 sizes and you can wash the base in the dishwasher is a great advantage. In the end, your choice will come down to which features and benefits are important to you. We hope that this article has helped you in your decision.

    Electric Skillet Recipes to Consider

    • Cheesy scalloped potatoes in brown bowls on marble background.
      Electric Skillet Scalloped Potatoes
    • Seafood chowder in a bowl with wooden fish on the side.
      Electric Skillet Seafood Chowder
    • Electric Skillet Chili in a white bowl with blue polka dots, wooden background, tortillas chips on the side.
      Electric Skillet Chili
    • English muffin sandwiches stacked on purple plate.
      Electric Skillet English Muffins

    If you enjoyed this buying guide for The Best Stainless Steel Electric Skillet Reviews or any other post on my website, please let me know what you thought in the 📝 comments below. And please share the post!

    How to Make a Mango-Pineapple Smoothie

    April 14, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    Whether you want a healthy breakfast or snack option, this bright, tropical smoothie will make mealtime easy and satisfying with its variety of fruits and refreshing taste. Here are some tips and info on how to make a mango-pineapple smoothie.

    Mango pineapple smoothies in 2 glasses with mango and mint skewers.

    The tartness of the pineapple, mango, and orange balances well with the creamy vanilla yogurt, adding protein to your drink. Do not let the idea of prepping discourage you from making this smoothie, as I use conveniently frozen fruit chunks and it takes only 5 minutes to prepare.

    I also made a blackberry smoothie bowl that you might like!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Mango pineapple smoothie ingredients prepped on light background.
    • frozen pineapple chunks - I buy pre-frozen bags of pineapple from the grocery store.
    • frozen mango chunks - I also buy these pre-frozen.
    • orange juice - I use unsweetened.
    • vanilla yogurt - I like Greek but you can use regular if preferred.
    • fresh mint leaves - To garnish. Leave it out if you don't like mint.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Vegan Variation

    For people who want a dairy-free version without yogurt, coconut cream is thicker than coconut milk and very creamy.

    Instructions

    Mango pineapple smoothie ingredients in blender.

    Step 1. Add the pineapple chunks, mango chunks, orange juice and yogurt to a blender.

    Mango pineapple smoothie ingredients in blender jar with orange being squeezed over top.

    You can add a few mint leaves too, if desired.

    Mango pineapple smoothie ingredients blending in blender jar.

    Step 2. Blend until smooth.

    Mango pineapple smoothie pouring into glass.

    Step 3. Pour the smoothie into glasses. You may add a garnish, if you like.

    Mango pineapple smoothies in 2 glasses with mango and mint skewers.

    Step 4. Serve the smoothies immediately.

    Tips

    Cutting the pineapple: If you decide to begin with fresh fruit instead of frozen, it can be a challenge when you are trying to cut prickly fruit like pineapple, but here are some steps on how to cut a pineapple. First, lay the pineapple on its side and while holding it down, slice the top and bottom off. Stand the pineapple up and carefully trim the skin from top to bottom.

    Remove the dark spots called eyes with a small paring knife. Cut the pineapple in half from top to bottom. Then, cut each piece lengthwise again. You will have 4 pieces. Make sure to cut the core from each piece. Chop further into chunks.

    Mango pineapple smoothie in glasses.

    Ripeness of the mango: Figuring out the ripeness of a fruit can be tricky, especially when they have different indicators. For example, a rounded watermelon with a large yellow spot on it means it is sweeter.

    As for the mango, there are three ways to figure out its ripeness: the texture, the color, and the smell.

    The texture should be soft, similar to a ripe avocado. For color, it should be mostly orange or yellow. If the smell of the mango is strong, it is ready for eating. If you are stuck with an unripe mango, cover it with a towel to speed up the process.

    Enhanced flavor. Using grilled pineapple can enhance your smoothie with a unique, sweet and smoky flavor. Check out my tutorial for how to grill pineapple.

    Mango pineapple smoothie in glass with mango skewer.

    ❤️More Fruit Forward Recipes You Will Love

    • Strawberry crumble in tart dish with vanilla ice cream and spoon.
      Easy Strawberry Crumble
    • Blackberry galette with brie cheese and thyme in cast iron pan.
      Blackberry Brie Galette
    • Grilled cubed mango on wooden skewers.
      Grilled Mango Skewers
    • Blueberry mojito mocktail with fresh mint in cocktail glass.
      Blueberry Mojito Mocktail

    How did this mango pineapple 🥤 smoothie compare to the McDonald's version? If you tried this recipe tutorial for How to Make a Mango-Pineapple Smoothie or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Mango pineapple smoothie in two glasses with skewered mango on top.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    How to Make a Mango-Pineapple Smoothie

    Here is a recipe tutorial for how to make a mango-pineapple smoothie. Whether you want a healthy breakfast or a snack option, this smoothie will make mealtime easy, nutritious, and satisfying.
    Course Breakfast, Drinks, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 2
    Calories 281kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Blender

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup frozen pineapple chunks
    • 1 ½ cups frozen mango chunks
    • 1 ½ cups orange juice
    • ½ cup vanilla yogurt
    • fresh mint leaves to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add the pineapple chunks, mango chunks, orange juice and yogurt to a blender. You can add a few mint leaves, if desired.
      Mango pineapple smoothie ingredients in blender jar with orange being squeezed over top.
    • Blend until smooth.
      Mango pineapple smoothie ingredients blending in blender jar.
    • Pour into glasses.
      Mango pineapple smoothie pouring into glass.
    • Serve, garnished with fresh mint leaves.
      Mango pineapple smoothie in glass with mango skewer.

    Notes

    • There are three ways to figure out the ripeness of a mango: the texture, the color, and the smell. The texture should be soft, similar to a ripe avocado. For color, it should be mostly orange or yellow. If the smell of the mango is strong, it is ready for eating. If you are stuck with an unripe mango, cover it with a towel to speed up the process.
    • For people who want a dairy-free version without yogurt, coconut cream is thicker than coconut milk and very creamy.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 281kcal | Carbohydrates: 65g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 45mg | Potassium: 861mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 58g | Vitamin A: 1796IU | Vitamin C: 150mg | Calcium: 158mg | Iron: 1mg

    Burrata Salad

    April 7, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    Cool and refreshing, this burrata salad is a delicious take on the classic Caprese salad. Instead of bocconcini, this recipe takes a fresh piece of burrata cheese and surrounds it with chopped tomatoes, leafy greens and a flavorful pesto dressing that perfectly complements the creaminess of the cheese.

    Burrata salad with cherry tomatoes on salad plate.

    I love the creaminess of the cheese when you slice it open combined with the basil pesto dressing. It gives you the same satisfaction as cutting into a runny, poached egg. This dish is fine-dining quality but easily made at home.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Burrata Salad?

    This appetizer or side dish uses fresh ingredients like tomatoes and burrata cheese with greens and features the colors of the Italian flag. This light, summery dish is the perfect complement to homemade pasta, grilled steak or a fresh charcuterie board.

    You can serve it at the start of an Italian-inspired meal or enjoy it by itself on a spring afternoon or hot summer day. Just make sure you serve it as soon as possible, as burrata salad is best when it's fresh.

    Burrata cheese on plate.

    If you've never had burrata cheese before (pictured above), you'll be pleasantly surprised by the mild, creamy flavor that brings out the taste of the vegetables and basil pesto dressing.

    Burrata is a sack of mozzarella filled with cream and shredded pieces of mozzarella. It is often made from cow's milk, but some varieties come from the milk of water buffalo. When you slice it open, the delicious, buttery cream oozes out onto your plate.

    Ingredients

    Burrata salad ingredients prepped and labeled on light wooden background.

    For the Salad:

    • a mix of greens - Such as arugula, baby spinach, baby red and/or green lettuce, radicchio etc. (you can use spring mix).
    • cherry tomatoes - You can substitute the cherry tomatoes with grape tomatoes if needed. Cherry tomatoes are a bit sweeter and bigger with thinner skins.
    • burrata cheese - One large burrata cheese, at room temperature for about 30 minutes before serving, to ensure the best flavor possible.

    For the Basil Pesto Dressing:

    • fresh basil leaves - Pick basil leaves that don't have dark spots or wilting. Choose a vibrantly green bundle. Read more about basil here.
    • garlic clove - Because the pesto dressing is raw, go easy on the garlic.
    • raw pine nuts - Pine nuts have a rich, buttery flavor.
    • olive oil - Be sure to use extra virgin for best quality.
    • lemon juice - Freshly squeezed.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: If you are looking for a meat component to add to your salad, try adding pieces of prosciutto right before serving.

    How to Make it

    For the Pesto Salad Dressing

    Basil pesto ingredients in food processor.

    Step 1. Combine the basil, garlic and pine nuts in a food processor.

    Basil pesto ingredients pulsed in food processor.

    Step 2. Pulse until coarsely chopped.

    Olive oil drizzling into pesto in food processor.

    Step 3. While the processor is running, slowly drizzle in the olive oil and lemon juice.

    Basil pesto in food processor with squeezed lemons on the side.

    Step 4. Blend until the consistency is smooth.

    Pesto dressing in a jar.

    Step 5. Season with salt and pepper, to taste. Set aside.

    To Assemble the Salad

    Cherry tomatoes quartered on cutting board.

    Step 1. Quarter the cherry tomatoes.

    Cherry tomatoes and mixed salad greens on plate.

    Step 2. Place the greens mix and cherry tomatoes on a large serving plate.

    Burrata salad on plate.

    Step 3. Add the burrata to the center of the salad.

    Burrata salad with spoonful of pesto.

    Step 4. Drizzle with the pesto dressing.

    Burrata cheese cut open over greens and tomatoes on plate.

    Step 5. Serve!

    Recipe Tips

    Burrata salad with the cheese cut open with a fork.
    • Serving size. This salad can be served as an appetizer for 4 people or side salad for 2. You can tear the burrata into pieces or simply cut it open and let the delicious cream soak into the salad and combine with the dressing.
    • Where to find burrata. You might not easily find burrata at your local grocery store, but I have had success finding it in the deli area. You can also grab a DIY cheese kit to make it at home, order it online or check out the nearest gourmet food store.
    • Make ahead. The pesto dressing can easily be made ahead of time and stored in the fridge for up to one week. In a pinch, you can replace it with olive oil and balsamic vinegar for a last-minute appetizer/side salad. If you have a few extra minutes on hand to make the dressing, it's worth it!

    Storage

    • This salad should be served and consumed immediately. Once the cheese is cut open, it is not recommended to store it for later.
    • Salad greens can last up to a week in the fridge or until the date on the package if it's given.
    • The dressing can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.

    Burrata Salad FAQs

    Do you eat the skin of burrata?

    For the best experience, the whole burrata is eaten together, including the 'skin'. The outside of the mozzarella is firm and the inside is creamy but it is all edible.

    What is the difference between mozzarella and burrata?

    Mozzarella cheese is a semi-soft cheese. Burrata cheese is made of mozzarella but it is formed into a sac and filled with cream and shredded cheese.

    Burrata salad with pesto dressing on plate and pesto dressing on the side.

    🔅More Refreshing Summer Recipes

    • Mango pineapple smoothie in two glasses with skewered mango on top.
      How to Make a Mango-Pineapple Smoothie
    • Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with watermelon swizzle stick.
      Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail
    • Strawberry shortcake ice cream in martini glasses with syrup pouring out of spoon.
      Strawberry Shortcake Ice Cream
    • Watermelon salad with basil in black salad bowl.
      Watermelon Basil Salad

    If you tried this 🥗 Burrata Salad Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Burrata salad with pesto dressing.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Burrata Salad

    This burrata salad recipe takes a fresh piece of burrata cheese and surrounds it with chopped tomatoes, leafy greens and a flavorful basil pesto dressing.
    Course Appetizer, Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine Italian
    Diet Low Salt, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 side salads
    Calories 84kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Food processor

    Ingredients

    For the Pesto Dressing:

    • ½ cup fresh basil leaves packed
    • 1 clove garlic chopped
    • 3 tablespoons raw pine nuts
    • ½ cup extra-virgin olive oil
    • 1 ½ tablespoons lemon juice
    • salt and pepper to taste

    For the Salad:

    • 4 cups mixed greens or spring mix
    • 1 cup cherry tomatoes quartered
    • 1 large burrata cheese at room temperature for 30 minutes
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Pesto Dressing:

    • Combine the basil, garlic and pine nuts in a food processor. Pulse until coarsely chopped.
    • While the processor is running, slowly drizzle in the olive oil and lemon juice. Blend until smooth.
    • Add salt and pepper, to taste.

    To Assemble the Salad:

    • Place the greens mix and cherry tomatoes on a large serving plate. Add the burrata to the center of the salad. Drizzle with the pesto dressing.
    • This salad can be served as an appetizer for 4 people (cutting or tearing the burrata into pieces) or side salad for 2.

    Notes

    • Nutrition info. The nutrition information for this recipe does not include the pesto dressing because it is too hard to determine how much dressing each person will use, if at all.
    • Types of mixed greens. For the mixed greens you can use arugula, baby spinach, baby red and/or green lettuce, radicchio etc.
    • Where to find burrata. You might not easily find burrata at your local grocery store, but I have had success finding it in the deli area. You can also grab a DIY cheese kit to make it at home, order it online or check out the nearest gourmet food store.
    • Dressing alternative. If you don't have time to make the pesto dressing, you can drizzle the salad with extra-virgin olive oil and balsamic vinegar in a pinch.
    • Storage. This salad should be served and consumed immediately. Once the cheese is cut open, it is not recommended to store it for later. Salad greens can last up to a week in the fridge or until the date on the package if it's given. The dressing can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 84kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 150mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 835IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 160mg | Iron: 1mg

    Homemade Strawberry Milk

    March 31, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Feel like a kid again with a tall glass of homemade strawberry milk. This recipe takes a homemade simple syrup made from fresh strawberries and sugar and combines it with cold milk to create a delicious dairy beverage that is thinner than a strawberry smoothie, but packed with strawberry flavor.

    Strawberry Milk in a glass jar with a straw on a wooden board with fresh strawberries and strawberry puree.

    The flavor is much like my homemade fresh strawberry juice but with the creamy goodness of milk. It's a more simple but delicious version of my whipped strawberry milk recipe.

    You can make it extra special by topping it with homemade grenadine whipped cream or adding some strawberry cake pops as a snack on the side.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥛 Homemade Strawberry Milk Vs. Store-Bought

    • Great alternative. This fresh, fruity drink is a perfect alternative to store-bought syrups that contain unwanted ingredients.
    • Fresh ingredients in homemade. This recipe uses real, fresh strawberries and only two other basic ingredients. When you make a homemade simple syrup for the milk, you don't need to add the preservatives and other chemical ingredients.
    • Unwanted ingredients in store-bought. Some commercial strawberry syrups and strawberry milks contain ingredients like glucose-fructose, high fructose corn syrup, sodium benzoate, modified corn starch, potassium sorbate, mono and diglycerides, flavor and color. I don't even see strawberries on that list...

    🍓 Ingredients

    Fresh strawberries, milk and strawberry syrup on cutting board.

    This recipe keeps it simple with only 3 ingredients:

    • fresh strawberries - You can also try this recipe with frozen strawberries but it may take longer to cook the syrup.
    • sugar - The sugar is used to make the homemade syrup which will blend nicely into the milk.
    • milk - I use whole milk but you can get creative with the recipe. For a vegan twist, replace the cow's milk with coconut milk, almond milk, soy milk, pumpkin milk or another dairy-free product.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    📄 How to Make Strawberry Milk

    Strawberries and sugar in pot.

    Step 1. Make the strawberry milk syrup. In a small pot, heat the strawberries, sugar and water over medium heat. Simmer until very soft (around 10 minutes).

    Strawberry sauce in strainer over pot.

    Step 2. Strain and discard strawberries. Strain the mixture through a fine mesh strainer. This will give you a clear strawberry syrup. Discard the strawberries from the strainer.

    Strawberry Milk in a glass jar and 2 straws on a wooden board.

    Step 3. Add syrup to milk and serve. Add 3-4 tablespoons of the strawberry syrup to each glass of cold milk (or to taste) and stir. Serve the homemade strawberry milk!

    ✅ Joss' Tips

    • Make it an adult beverage by spiking it with some vodka or white rum and it will taste more like my strawberry liqueur.
    • You can serve it hot or cold and use the leftover strawberry syrup for another sweet treat or beverage that you would like to add strawberry flavor to.
    • This drink is best served fresh, so don't pour the syrup into the milk until you're ready to drink it.
    • If you're planning ahead, you can make a batch of homemade syrup and store it in the fridge, then mix the beverages whenever you're ready.
    • The syrup in this recipe is clear, but you could purée the strawberry mixture in a blender instead of straining it, to get a thicker syrup with more texture and fiber.

    🍰 Other Ways to Use up the Syrup

    After you've made strawberry milk, you can use the leftover strawberry syrup in a number of other ways.

    • Add it to smoothies. For example, pour it in a blender with a banana, dates and/or other types of fruit to make a nutritious fruit smoothie.
    • Spoon it over a strawberry sundae.
    • Pour it over pancakes or ice cream (such as my strawberry shortcake no churn ice cream).
    • Make fruit punch.
    • Bake a strawberry cake or these pink champagne cake balls.
    • Serve up delicious strawberry milkshakes for you and your family members.
    • Try adding fresh strawberry slices to make a sweet strawberry glaze for your cakes and pastries.
    • You can even add it to drinks like lemonade, iced tea and homemade cocktails or a strawberry mojito mocktail.
    • For a unique summer treat, make shaved ice at home and pour the strawberry syrup on top.

    ❓ Recipe FAQs

    How do you store the leftover strawberry syrup?

    This recipe makes about ¾ cup strawberry syrup. If you have any leftover, it can be stored in an airtight container (like a squeeze bottle) in the refrigerator for up to 1 month and use it in the ways listed above or for more strawberry milk.

    What is strawberry milk made of?

    It's simply a combination of cold milk, strawberries and sugar.

    Can I mix strawberry with milk?

    Strawberries and milk are a much-loved food combination and many treats and beverages use this creamy strawberry flavor-duo.

    Strawberry Milk in a glass jar with a straw on a wooden board.

    ❤️ More Strawberry Recipes You Will Love

    • Virgin frozen strawberry daiquiri in wine glass with strawberry-mint garnish.
      Virgin Frozen Strawberry Daiquiri
    • Strawberry vinaigrette dressing drizzling down spoon into small jar.
      Easy Strawberry Vinaigrette Dressing
    • Strawberry ice cream sundae with chocolate shavings in curved bowl.
      Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae
    • Strawberry crumble in tart dish with vanilla ice cream and spoon.
      Easy Strawberry Crumble

    If you tried this Homemade Strawberry Milk Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Homemade strawberry milk with straw in jar on cutting board.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Homemade Strawberry Milk

    This homemade, strawberry milk recipe takes a simple syrup made from fresh strawberries and sugar and combines it with cold milk to create a delicious dairy beverage.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 2
    Calories 282kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup strawberries cleaned and chopped
    • ½ cup sugar
    • ¼ cup water
    • 2 cups milk whole milk is best
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a small pot, heat the strawberries, sugar and water over medium heat. Simmer until very soft (around 10 minutes).
      1 cup strawberries, ½ cup sugar, ¼ cup water
    • Strain the mixture through a fine mesh strainer*. This will give you a clear strawberry syrup. Discard the strawberries from the strainer.
    • Add 3-4 tablespoons of the strawberry syrup to each glass of cold milk (or to taste) and stir.
      2 cups milk
    • Serve!

    Notes

    • Syrup Storage: Store any leftover syrup in the refrigerator for up to 1 month.
    • Frozen Strawberries: This recipe also works with frozen strawberries.
    • Yield: Makes approximately ¾ cup strawberry sauce.
    • *Purée Option: You could purée the strawberry mixture in a blender instead of straining it, to get a thicker syrup with more texture, but it won't be clear.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 282kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 24mg | Sodium: 107mg | Potassium: 405mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 45g | Vitamin A: 402IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 286mg | Iron: 1mg

    Oatmeal Porridge With Toppings

    March 24, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Getting kids to eat healthy AND early in the morning can be difficult at times, but with these individual oatmeal porridge shots, kids will enjoy the delicious toppings as well as the fun way to eat them! And this breakfast is not just for kids; adults can enjoy them too.

    Oatmeal porridge jars with various toppings on white background.

    The toppings are what make this recipe sweet (strawberries, chocolate chips, maple syrup, etc.), but the small jars or dessert cups are what make this breakfast porridge fun! They're also great for serving at sleepovers and birthday parties.

    Oatmeal tends to result in quick fullness, so kids can sometimes end up leaving half their bowl before flying out the door for school. With these individual oatmeal jars, the portions are small and kids can have as little as 1 or grab some more if they're feeling famished.

    Your kids might also enjoy these banana cake pops and brownie bites.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Difference Between Porridge and Oatmeal

    Let's get the confusion out of the way first. With ingredients like rolled oats, it is confusing to tell the difference between porridge and oatmeal. While they are sometimes used interchangeably, there is a difference between the two: oatmeal is simply a type of porridge.

    While oatmeal always uses oats (like in my electric skillet oatmeal cookies), porridge isn't always made with oats. Other ingredients porridge can be made with are cornmeal, rice, potatoes, quinoa, semolina and other legumes or grains. This recipe uses rolled oats; a standard when it comes to porridge recipes.

    Oatmeal Porridge Ingredients

    Rolled oats and milk in jars.
    • quick oats - These are rolled oats that have been processed further to reduce the cooking time.
    • milk - I use a combination of milk and water to cook the oats. You can use only milk or only water if you prefer. Using milk will make your porridge more thick and sticky while water will make it thinner.
    • sugar - Or sugar substitute.
    • salt - A pinch of salt enhances the flavor of the oatmeal.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Topping Ideas

    I wanted my kids to have options, so I prepared 2 individual jars with each topping. The toppings for these oatmeal porridges include:

    Porridge shots with banana and cinnamon topping, white background.

    Topping #1:

    • strawberry slices
    • yogurt
    • poppy seeds
    Porridge shots with peanut butter and jam topping, white background.

    Topping #2:

    • peanut butter
    • jelly
    • chopped hazelnuts
    Porridge shots with bananas and cinnamon.

    Topping #3:

    • sliced bananas
    • maple syrup
    • cinnamon powder
    Porridge shots with gummies and chocolate chips.

    Topping #4:

    • jellies/gummies (you could use mini marshmallows instead of jellies for a S'mores version!)
    • crushed sweet biscuits (like graham wafers)
    • mini chocolate chips

    Chef's Note: My personal favorite is peanut butter and jelly! I love this combination in my grilled peanut butter and jelly too.

    Tweaks

    You don't need to stick to this recipe 100%. You can swap some of these ingredients for your kids' favorite toppings, especially if they are picky eaters or have nut allergies!

    • Mini marshmallows are a good substitute for the jellies.
    • You can swap the poppy seeds for chia seeds or if you want to stick to sweets.
    • I've even chopped up this easy, homemade Bananas Foster dessert and added it as a topping.
    • You can go in a completely different direction with butternut squash seeds. Get creative with it!

    How to Make Them

    Milk pouring into saucepan with oatmeal.

    Step 1: Combine Oats & Liquid. Combine rolled oats, milk and water in a medium saucepan.

    A woman's hand holding a small bowl of sugar over a pot.

    Step 2: Bring to Boil. Add sugar and salt. Mix well. Bring to a boil.

    Oatmeal in a saucepan.

    Step 3: Simmer. Lower heat to a simmer. Cook (uncovered) until creamy and oats are softened, about 3 to 5 minutes, stirring occasionally. Remove from heat, cover and let ret rest for around 2 minutes.

    Oatmeal on a wooden spoon and in small jar.

    Step 4: Spoon into Jars. Spoon the porridge into 8 (4 ounce) dessert glasses or small jars, leaving some room for the toppings.

    Porridge shots with peanut butter, jelly and hazelnuts.

    Step 5: Serve! Serve the porridge with the topping options (or use your kids' favorite toppings!).

    Chef's Note: I used 2 jars for each porridge topping. Kids can pick and choose their porridge. This is a fun way to get kids to eat their breakfast!

    Porridge shots with bananas and cinnamon.

    Serving Suggestions

    If you wish to have something with your porridge, like a drink on the side, a cup of milk will go well with it, especially if you want something to cool you down from eating the hot oatmeal porridge. You can also try this fresh strawberry milk.

    I find 4 ounces to be a good serving size for this oatmeal. You can use small glass jars or even small dessert bowls. I don't recommend plastic, because the porridge is served warm. Chemical leaching can occur quicker when plastic has been heated.

    You could even make it breakfast bar style and have an assortment of toppings on the table for everyone to make their own combinations.

    Storage

    The oatmeal porridge tastes best if served immediately. But if you do end up having leftovers, cover the jars and store them in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 5 days, depending on the toppings.

    Oatmeal is reheatable and you can add a bit more liquid to loosen it up if you find it really thick after refrigerating.

    Porridge shots with peanut butter, jelly and hazelnuts, strawberries and poppy seeds.

    ❤️More Breakfast Recipes You Will Love

    • Electric skillet French toast stuffed with Nutella and topped with sliced apples and icing sugar.
      Electric Skillet Stuffed French Toast
    • Chorizo and eggs on plate with fork.
      Mexican Chorizo and Eggs
    • Orange chocolate chip muffin cut open.
      Orange Chocolate Chip Muffins
    • Korean kimchi scrambled eggs in pan.
      Kimchi Scrambled Eggs

    What toppings did your kids love on their jar of porridge? If you tried this Oatmeal Porridge With Toppings Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Oatmeal porridge with toppings in jars.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Oatmeal Porridge With Toppings

    With these individual oatmeal porridge breakfast servings, kids will enjoy the delicious toppings as well as the fun way to eat them! This is a great way to get kids to eat their breakfast.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 mini servings
    Calories 100kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 8 (4 oz.) shot glasses or small jars*

    Ingredients

    For the Porridge Base

    • 1 ½ cups quick oats
    • 1 cup milk
    • 2 cups water
    • ¼ cup sugar or sugar substitute
    • ¼ teaspoon salt

    Toppings

    • strawberry slices, yogurt and poppy seeds
    • peanut butter, jelly and chopped hazelnuts
    • banana slices, maple syrup and cinnamon
    • jellies, crushed sweet biscuits (like graham wafers) and mini chocolate chips you could use mini marshmallows instead of jellies for a s'mores version!
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Combine rolled oats, milk and water in a medium saucepan.
      Milk pouring into saucepan with oatmeal.
    • Add sugar and salt. Mix well. Bring to a boil.
      A woman's hand holding a small bowl of sugar over a pot.
    • Lower heat to a simmer. Cook (uncovered) until creamy and oats are softened, about 3 to 5 minutes, stirring occasionally. Remove from heat, cover and let ret rest for around 2 minutes.
      Oatmeal in a saucepan.
    • Spoon the porridge into 8 small jars or dessert bowls, leaving some room for the toppings.
      Oatmeal on a wooden spoon and in small jar.
    • Serve the individual porridge shots with the topping options above (or use your kids' favorite toppings!). Kids can pick and choose their porridge.
      Porridge shots with peanut butter, jelly and hazelnuts, strawberries and poppy seeds.

    Notes

    • Nutrition information does not include the toppings for this recipe since there are different variations and amounts.
    • *You can use whatever size dessert glasses or jars you like, but make sure they are wide enough to fit a teaspoon into them (or get some mini spoons). I do not recommend plastic, as the porridge is served warm.
    • **The porridge tastes best if served immediately. But if you do end up having leftovers, cover the jars and store them in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 5 days, depending on the toppings.
    • Oatmeal is reheatable and you can add a bit more liquid to loosen it up as well.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 100kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 75mg | Potassium: 95mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 49IU | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 1mg

    Smoked Salmon Pasta Salad

    March 17, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 15 Comments

    This smoked salmon pasta salad has it all when it comes to flavor and texture with the addition of mandarin oranges, celery and capers. It's smoky, citrusy and crunchy! It's a meatier, brighter, and more flavored version of the average pasta salad; and best of all, it takes less than 20 minutes to prepare.

    Smoked salmon pasta salad in a dark bowl with a wooden spoon and off-white dish cloth.

    This delicious side dish combines the smoky saltiness of the salmon, the tart sweetness of the mandarin oranges, the fresh crunch of the celery, the filling pasta of your choice, and the earthy herbs to enhance the fresh taste. The flavors may be layered, but the process is easy.

    It's great for meal prep, picnics, backyard BBQ's, warm weather meals etc. It's typically served as a side but can also be a main dish.

    You might also like my other pasta salads including this creamy tuna pasta salad, cold taco pasta salad, dill pickle pasta salad and caprese pasta salad.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Smoked salmon pasta salad ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • dry penne pasta - You can swap out the penne for whatever short-pasta you have on hand such as Fusilli, elbow, rotini or bowtie.
    • hot-smoked salmon - The flaky kind. Read more about hot smoked salmon further down.
    • mandarin oranges - The salad may be salty with its smoked salmon and capers, but the salad breaks the saltiness down with citrus fruit like lemon juice and mandarin oranges. If you want a fruit that is similar to mandarin oranges but with a sweeter taste, I recommend clementines. They are honey-sweet, a tad sour, seedless (less hassle for you), and are related to mandarins.
    • celery - For some crunch!
    • mayonnaise - This pasta salad uses mayo to help bind the ingredients together. If you wish to use an alternative ingredient similar to mayo to bind them, Greek yogurt or sour cream have a similar creamy and tangy taste.
    • fresh dill - Check out how to chop dill for salad. You can substitute with dried dill (but use a little less).

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Difference Between Hot-Smoked and Cold-Smoked Salmon

    The reason my recipe specifies hot-smoked salmon is because hot-smoked salmon and cold-smoked salmon have different tastes and textures due to their unique processes.

    Both of them are cured, rinsed and smoked. However, the cold-smoked version is cured in salt to draw out the moisture and is smoked around 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

    On the other hand, hot-smoked is cured using salt water or wet brine and smoked at a higher temperature of around 120 degrees Fahrenheit.

    Because of these differences, the cold version has a silky texture and fresh taste (which is great on bagels and crackers), while the hot version is flakier and tastes smokier. The hot-smoked version is what I use in this salad for its flakier texture and smokiness.

    How to Make Smoked Salmon Pasta Salad

    Here are four simple steps to make this smoked salmon salad:

    Penne pasta cooking in pot.

    Step 1. Cook pasta. Prepare pasta al dente, according to package instructions.

    Penne pasta draining in mesh strainer.

    Step 2. Drain. Drain and rinse with cool water.

    Smoked salmon pasta salad ingredients in white bowl.

    Step 3. Mix together. Mix all of the ingredients (except for the chives) with the pasta in a large bowl. Season with salt and pepper, to taste.

    Smoked salmon pasta salad in bowl with fresh lemon, salt and pepper on the side.

    Step 4. Chill and serve. You can serve the smoked salmon pasta salad right away or chill in the refrigerator for later (1 to 2 hours). When ready to serve, top with chives.

    Joss' Top Tips

    • For the best texture, be sure to cook the pasta until just al dente (cooked but still a tad firm) and then immediately rinse with cool water to stop the cooking process. There is nothing worse than a mushy pasta salad.
    • Instead of a side dish, you may want to serve this as a hot smoked salmon pasta lunch or dinner. To do this, simply serve it right away without chilling the ingredients and don't rinse the pasta with cool water.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long do leftovers last in the fridge?

    You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 5 days.

    Can it be made ahead of time?

    Yes! This is why I love pasta salads. You can make it head of time, store it in the fridge and then just give it a mix to freshen things up when ready to serve.

    Can I make it gluten free?

    Yes, you can find gluten free pasta easily in the grocery store these days. You could also swap the pasta for quinoa.

    Can salmon pasta salad be frozen?

    I don't recommend freezing this pasta salad because the texture can become unappetizing and some of the ingredients do not thaw well.

    Smoked salmon pasta salad with mandarin oranges and capers in black dish.

    More Delicious Seafood Recipes to Consider

    • Ceviche on yellow plate.
      How to Make Ceviche (Step by Step)
    • Chickpea and salmon salad in bowl with lemon slices.
      Easy Chickpea Salmon Salad
    • Bacon wrapped scallops with parsley on blue plate.
      Bacon Wrapped Scallops (Oven)
    • Golden fish sticks in ramekin.
      Fish Sticks with Sweet Mayo

    Do you like it served warm or cold? If you tried this Smoked Salmon Pasta Salad Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Smoked salmon pasta salad in black dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 9 votes

    Smoked Salmon Pasta Salad

    This smoked salmon pasta salad has it all when it comes to flavor and texture with the addition of mandarin oranges, celery and capers. It's smoky, citrusy and crunchy!
    Course Main Course, Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 309kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups dry penne pasta or other short pasta of your choice
    • 2 cups hot-smoked salmon the flaky kind--broken into chunks
    • ½ cup mandarin oranges peeled and separated
    • ½ cup celery diced
    • ¼ cup capers
    • ¼ cup mayonnaise
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or to taste
    • 3 tablespoons fresh dill chopped (or 1 tablespoon dried dill)
    • ¼ cup chives finely chopped
    • salt and pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Prepare pasta al dente, according to package instructions. Drain and rinse with cool water.
    • Mix all ingredients (except for the chives) with the pasta in a large bowl. Season with salt and pepper, to taste.
    • You can serve the pasta salad right away or chill in the refrigerator for later (1 to 2 hours). When ready to serve, top with chives.

    Video

    Notes

    • Pasta choices: Some more pasta choices include Fusilli, elbow, rotini or bowtie.
    • Pasta texture: For the best texture, be sure to cook the pasta until just al dente and then immediately rinse with cool water to stop the cooking process.
    • Hot serving option: Instead of a side dish, you may want to serve this as a hot pasta lunch or dinner. To do this, simply serve it right away without chilling the ingredients and don't rinse the pasta with cool water.
    • Leftover storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 5 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 309kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 22mg | Sodium: 944mg | Potassium: 352mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1162IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 57mg | Iron: 2mg

    Homemade Whipped Topping (3 Flavors)

    March 10, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Heavy cream and fresh ingredients are blended together to make three sweet and savory flavors of homemade whipped topping, that are begging to be scooped onto your cakes, pies, pastries, beverages and more.

    Whipped topping in a bowl with cinnamon and honey in a separate bowl.

    This flavored whipped cream has a rich, full-bodied flavor that is perfect for topping your favorite sweet treats and snacks. Preparation takes only five minutes, so you can whip up a batch of your favorite variety in no time.

    I love scooping it over this pumpkin martini and Christmas morning fruit salad but with the variety of flavors, you can add it to many more treats and dishes that need a little something extra. If you want plain, homemade whipped topping, simply omit the flavoring ingredients and just use a little sugar.

    I also make grenadine flavored whipped cream and peppermint whipped cream that you might want to try.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    #1. Sweet Bourbon Flavor

    Whipped topping in a small bowl, bourbon in a small glass and a scoop of brown sugar on wooden background.

    To begin, I have a Bourbon and Brown Sugar whipped cream; an adult-flavor that tastes dreamy on cakes, pies, lattes, etc. Take your date night up a notch by serving it with some strawberries or other fruit for dipping.

    Ingredients

    Sweet bourbon whipped topping ingredients labeled.
    • heavy cream - It's also called heavy whipping cream.
    • bourbon - Bourbon is a type of American whiskey that is aged in new, charred oak barrels.
    • brown sugar - I use dark for a deeper flavor.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    Sweet bourbon whipped topping ingredients in bowl.

    Step 1. Add heavy cream, bourbon and brown sugar to a large mixing bowl.

    Sweet bourbon whipped topping in bowl with electric whisk.

    Step 2. Beat with an electric hand mixer, until stiff peaks form.

    Homemade whipped topping with brown sugar and bourbon in small jar.

    Step 3. Serve!

    Chef's Note: One variation could be swapping the Bourbon out for Irish whiskey and topping your next hot Irish Coffee with it.

    #2. Lemon-Dill Flavor

    Homemade whipped topping with lemon and dill in small jar.

    When most people think of whipped toppings, they think of sweet treats like ice cream cakes, chocolate mug cake, chocolate pie, strawberry ice cream sundaes and strawberry shakes. Homemade whipped cream adds a lightness (similar to the texture of my fluffy pumpkin dip) to your favorite desserts.

    But if you want to take it a step further, you can infuse the heavy cream with fresh ingredients that transform it into a savory whipped cream like lemon zest, ground mustard, dill, garlic and/or other spices.

    Similar to compound butter, this recipe takes a basic condiment and infuses it with a distinct flavor that transforms the dish.

    Ingredients

    Savory lemon dill whipped cream ingredients labeled.
    • heavy cream - Heavy cream has at least 36% milk fat but light whipping cream (30-36%) will work too.
    • salt - Regular table salt, Himalayan salt or sea salt is fine.
    • ground mustard - It's also known as mustard powder or dry mustard.
    • lemon zest - From a fresh lemon. You can use a microplane zester, a box grater or even a knife if you must.
    • fresh dill - Check out how to chop dill for this recipe.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    Heavy cream and mustard powder in measuring glass.

    Step 1. Add heavy cream to a large mixing bowl with the salt and ground mustard.

    Lemon dill whipped cream getting whipped with hand mixer.

    Step 2. Beat with an electric hand mixer, until stiff peaks form.

    Lemon and dill getting folded into whipped cream.

    Step 3. Gently fold in the lemon zest and fresh dill.

    Whipped topping with lemon zest and dill in a small glass jar on wooden background, with a small spoon of mustard powder.

    Step 4. Serve!

    Try this zesty Lemon-Dill homemade whipped topping on savory dishes for a fluffier, lighter version of compound butter. What to use it on? Think salmon, potatoes, vegetables, soup, canapés, etc. For example, I have a tutorial for how to cook salmon with skin that it would taste amazing on as well as this potato and leek soup.

    It also pairs well with toast, crackers and crusty bread as well as savory pies and pastries. Try it on this chicken pasty pie.

    Serve this topping as a party dip or add it to the main course to balance out the flavors. With so many options, there are endless ways to experiment in the kitchen.

    #3. Pumpkin Pie Spiced Flavor

    Homemade whipped topping with cinnamon and honey in small jar.

    Lastly, this Pumpkin-Spiced homemade whipped topping is the perfect addition to fall treats and beverages! It is sweetened with a touch of honey and spiced with pre-blended pumpkin-pie spice; usually consisting of cinnamon, nutmeg, ginger, cloves and allspice.

    Ingredients

    Pumpkin pie spice whipped topping ingredients labeled.
    • heavy cream - You can use light or heavy whipping cream.
    • honey - The liquid kind.
    • pumpkin pie spice - Check out how to make pumpkin pie spice.
    • cinnamon powder - Just a pinch.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    Pumpkin pie spice whipped topping ingredients in measuring glass.

    Step 1. Add heavy cream to a large mixing bowl with the honey, pumpkin pie spice and cinnamon powder.

    Pumpkin pie spice whipped topping in measuring glass with electric mixer.

    Step 2. Beat with an electric hand mixer, until stiff peaks form.

    Whipped topping in a bowl with cinnamon and honey in a separate bowl.

    Step 3. Serve!

    Try dipping into it with some apple slices or other fall fruits. Serve it over this clear pumpkin pie and other Thanksgiving desserts.

    Pro Tips

    • Chill Everything: Make sure your heavy cream, mixing bowl and beaters are well chilled for at least 15 minutes before starting. This helps the cream whip up faster and stay firm longer.
    • Opt for Heavy Cream/Heavy Whipping Cream: It has a higher fat content (around 36-40%) compared to regular whipping cream (about 30% to 35%%). The higher fat content is better for achieving stiff peaks.
    • Whip at Medium Speed to Start: Start whipping the cream on medium or low speed to avoid splashing the cream all over your kitchen and overwhipping.
    • Watch Closely: As the cream thickens, watch closely. It goes from soft peaks to stiff peaks quite quickly.
    • Stabilize if Needed: If you need the whipped cream to hold its shape for a longer time (like if you're using it as a frosting or making it in advance), you can stabilize it by:
      • #1. Adding a small amount of cornstarch. 1 tablespoon of cornstarch for every cup of cream.
      • #2. Adding unflavored gelatin. Dissolve 1 teaspoon in a little water, let it cool, then add to the cream as it starts to thicken.
      • #3. Adding cream of tartar. For cream of tartar, just a ½ teaspoon per cup of heavy cream should do.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long can you store homemade whipped cream?

    It is best if used within 1 day, but can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 or 4 days if you stabilize it. It will start to deflate over time. You can also store it in a container in the freezer for up to 3 months.

    These toppings are made with heavy cream, so make sure you keep them in the fridge so they won't spoil. Try storing your whipped cream in a glass jar or a covered bowl at the back of the fridge to maintain freshness.

    What is the difference between whipping cream and whipped topping?

    'Whipping cream' is the liquid that you use to whip into a topping. When people use the term 'whipped topping', they are usually referring to cream that has already been whipped and sweetened (like frozen Cool Whip).

    'Whipped cream' is basically the same as 'whipped topping' and I use these two terms interchangeably.

    Is powdered sugar or granulated sugar better for whipped cream?

    Opt for powdered sugar rather than granulated sugar-it can help the cream maintain its structure longer.

    Can you whip milk instead of cream?

    No, the milk fat percentage is too low in milk to whip it like you would heavy cream.

    Can you over whip whipping cream?

    Yes! If you overwhip the cream, it can become grainy and then eventually turn into butter.

    More Amazing Dessert Toppings to Try

    • Strawberry rhubarb sauce in stemless wine glass with spoon.
      Strawberry Rhubarb Sauce (Compote)
    • Chocolate gravy drizzling from spoon over pot.
      Easy Homemade Chocolate Gravy
    • Strawberry pureé over custard in small jars.
      Easy Strawberry Purée (Coulis)
    • White chocolate ganache drizzling from spoon into bowl.
      White Chocolate Ganache

    If you tried this Homemade Whipped Topping Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Whipped cream topping in jar with cinnamon stick.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Homemade Whipped Topping in 3 Flavors

    Heavy cream and fresh ingredients are blended together to make three sweet and savory flavors of homemade whipped topping.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American, French, Italian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 ¼ cup servings
    Calories 103kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric hand mixer

    Ingredients

    Lemon-Dill

    • ½ cup heavy cream
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground mustard
    • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
    • 1 teaspoon fresh dill chopped

    Bourbon & Brown Sugar

    • ½ cup heavy cream
    • 1 ½ tablespoons bourbon
    • 1 ½ tablespoons brown sugar

    Pumpkin Pie Spiced

    • ½ cup heavy cream
    • 1 ½ tablespoons honey
    • ¼ teaspoon pumpkin pie spice
    • 1 pinch cinnamon powder
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Lemon-Dill Whipped Topping

    • Add heavy cream to a large mixing bowl with the salt and ground mustard.
      ½ cup heavy cream, ¼ teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon ground mustard
    • Beat with an electric hand mixer, until stiff peaks form.
    • Gently fold in the lemon zest and fresh dill.
      ½ teaspoon lemon zest, 1 teaspoon fresh dill
    • Serve!
      Whipped topping with lemon zest and dill in a small glass jar on wooden background, with a small spoon of mustard powder.

    For the Bourbon & Brown Sugar Whipped Topping

    • Add heavy cream, bourbon and brown sugar to a large mixing bowl.
      ½ cup heavy cream, 1 ½ tablespoons bourbon, 1 ½ tablespoons brown sugar
    • Beat with an electric hand mixer, until stiff peaks form.
    • Serve!
      Whipped topping in a small bowl, bourbon in a small glass and a scoop of brown sugar on wooden background.

    For the Pumpkin Pie Spiced Whipped Topping

    • Add heavy cream to a large mixing bowl with the honey, pumpkin pie spice and cinnamon powder.
      ½ cup heavy cream, 1 ½ tablespoons honey, ¼ teaspoon pumpkin pie spice, 1 pinch cinnamon powder
    • Beat with an electric hand mixer, until stiff peaks form.
    • Serve!
      Whipped topping in a bowl with cinnamon and honey in a separate bowl.

    Notes

    • Nutrition info note: The nutrition information is calculated for the whipped cream base only. It does not include the flavorings because there are 3 separate recipes.
    • Yield: Each recipe produces approximately 1 cup of whipped topping.
    • Fridge storage:  It is best if used within 1 day, but can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 or 4 days if you stabilize it. It will start to deflate over time. Try storing your whipped cream in a glass jar or a covered bowl at the back of the fridge to maintain freshness.
    • Freezer: You can also store it in a container in the freezer for up to 3 months.
    • Make a bigger  batch: You can easily double or triple the recipe by using the servings slider on the recipe card.
    • Chill everything: Make sure your heavy cream, mixing bowl and beaters are well chilled for at least 15 minutes before starting. This helps the cream whip up faster and stay firm longer.
    • Watch closely because as the cream thickens, it goes from soft peaks to stiff peaks quite quickly.
    • Stabilize if Needed: If you need the whipped cream to hold its shape for a longer time (like if you're using it as a frosting or making it in advance), you can stabilize it by:
      • #1. Adding a small amount of cornstarch. 1 tablespoon of cornstarch for every cup of cream.
      • #2. Adding unflavored gelatin. Dissolve 1 teaspoon in a little water, let it cool, then add to the cream as it starts to thicken.
      • #3. Adding cream of tartar. For cream of tartar, just a ½ teaspoon per cup of heavy cream should do.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 103kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 11mg | Potassium: 22mg | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 437IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 1mg

    Peppermint Whipped Cream

    March 8, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    Top o' the morning to ya! Here is an easy and quick way to add some holiday flair to your beverages or desserts this St. Patrick's Day.

    Peppermint whipped cream will give your morning cuppa a taste of the Irish. Add in some green food coloring to make your own mint flavored masterpiece and watch the Instagram likes roll in.

    Green peppermint whipped cream with sprinkles and black curled spoon in glass.

    This is a kid-created recipe made by my daughter. My son's summer mango-pomegranate soda is also-kid created. If you want to get your kids in the kitchen, making homemade whipped topping is a great place to start!

    Not only is it fun and easy for them to help make, but they can pick their own favorite flavors to experiment with. Peppermint is the flavor my daughter chose, which is perfect timing as St. Patrick's Day happens to be just around the corner.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Peppermint whipped cream ingredients labeled.
    • whipping cream - At least 30% or more milk fat is needed for whipping. However, because we are adding in other ingredients, I recommend at least 33% M.F. whipping cream.
    • agave nectar - You can use white sugar if you prefer.
    • peppermint extract - You only need a small amount of mint extract because it is strong in comparison to other flavor extracts.
    • green food coloring - The food coloring is definitely optional, but it is fun to serve green food and drink on St. Patrick's Day.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: Optionally, you can top it with some chocolate cookie crumbs, chocolate syrup and/or sprinkles to make it even more festive.

    How to Make Peppermint Whipped Cream

    Peppermint whipped cream ingredients in bowl.

    Step 1. Add heavy cream to a large mixing bowl with the sugar, peppermint extract and green food coloring.

    Peppermint whipped cream in bowl.

    Step 2. Beat with an electric hand mixer, until stiff peaks form.

    Green peppermint whipped cream in glass in hand.

    Step 3. Top with sprinkles or chocolate, if desired. Serve the peppermint whipped cream!

    Joss' Tips

    • Chill the cream. You may have heard this before, but one big whipped-cream making tip I can give you is to make sure the heavy cream is well-chilled. This should result in a quicker, lighter whipped cream.
    • Chill the beaters. Same goes for the bowls and beater. Simply pop them into the fridge for 10 to 15 minutes before beginning. This isn't a necessary step, but if you can remember to do this ahead of time, it's nice to have a whipped cream that will stay emulsified longer.
    • Don't overbeat. Be careful not to over-beat the cream! You will have a nice and smooth, creamy texture to your whipped topping if you can stop at just the right time. The cream will end up separating if you go too far.

    How to Use Your Fresh Mint Whipped Cream

    • I personally love topping my latte or other beverages with the fluffy clouds and then drizzling it with chocolate syrup for a fresh chocolate-mint flavor.
    • You can use it on desserts like this grasshopper pie, no churn ice cream, or as a filling. Serve it with fresh fruit, on top of pancakes or waffles, etc.
    • Serve it after a yummy St. Patrick's Day Guinness stew or cabbage and bacon.

    Storage

    Your topping is best served immediately, but can also be covered and chilled in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours.

    Green peppermint whipped cream with black spoon in glass.

    ❤️ More Delicious Dessert Recipes to Consider

    • Grenadine whipped cream in bowl with electric mixer.
      Grenadine Whipped Cream
    • Cake mix cake pops in small pails with sprinkles on top.
      How to Make Cake Pops with Cake Mix
    • Green homemade gummies on cutting board.
      How to Make Gummies at Home
    • Mochi ice cream ball on small dish.
      How to Make Mochi Ice Cream (Video)

    If you tried this Peppermint Whipped Cream Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Green peppermint whipped cream in glass with curled black spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Peppermint Whipped Cream

    Peppermint whipped cream is an easy and quick way to add some holiday flair to your beverages or desserts this St. Patrick's Day.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American, Irish
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 ¼ cup servings
    Calories 120kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric mixer

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup heavy whipping cream
    • 2 ½ tablespoons agave nectar or white sugar
    • 1 ½ teaspoons peppermint extract
    • 5 drops green food coloring or enough to reach desired color--optional
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add heavy cream to a large mixing bowl with the sugar, peppermint extract and green food coloring.
    • Beat with an electric hand mixer, until stiff peaks form.
    • Serve!

    Notes

    • This recipe yields about 2 cups whipped cream.
    • Your topping is best served immediately, but can also be covered and chilled in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours.
    • You may have heard this before, but one big whipped-cream making tip I can give you is to make sure the heavy cream, bowls and beater are all chilled. This should result in a quicker, lighter whipped cream.
    • Be careful not to over-beat the cream! You will have a nice and smooth, creamy texture to your whipped topping if you can stop at just the right time. The cream will end up separating if you go too far.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 12mg | Potassium: 24mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 437IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 1mg

    Irish Slow Cooker Cabbage & Bacon

    March 3, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    If you are out of luck in ideas for St. Patrick's Day side dishes, this Irish cabbage and bacon recipe will save you on prep time. You can literally dump your ingredients into the slow cooker and let it cook for hours without constant supervision.

    Cooked cabbage and bacon in black bowls and 4 leaf clovers on the side.

    The chopped cabbage is soaked in chicken broth, bacon fat and white wine vinegar, giving a nice balance of salty and sour.

    I always serve slow cooker cabbage for St. Patrick's Day with corned beef brisket, mint grasshopper pie and a hot glass of Irish Coffee.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Raw cabbage, bacon and butter labeled on blue background.
    • green cabbage - You can use purple cabbage but the color it turns out when it's cooked is not as appetizing.
    • bacon - I like to use thick-cut bacon strips but you can use your favorite kind or whatever you have on hand.
    • white wine vinegar - You can substitute with apple cider vinegar.
    • butter - Butter is optional. It's delicious but leave it out if you don't want the extra calories.

    *Check the recipe card for full ingredients and amounts.

    How to Cook Cabbage and Bacon

    Raw green cabbage and butter in slow cooker.

    Step 1: Add the cabbage, vinegar, broth, butter, salt and pepper to the slow cooker.

    Raw bacon strips in pan with tongs.

    Step 2: Fry the bacon in a skillet over medium heat, until golden-brown on both sides.

    Bacon grease in pan pouring into slow cooker with cabbage and bacon.

    Step 3: Add the bacon and the bacon grease to the slow cooker with the cabbage. Mix well.

    Cabbage and bacon in slow cooker with lid.

    Step 4: Cover and cook on high for 2-3 hours or low for 3-4 hours, or until desired softness.

    Chef's Note: I like to give it another mix half way through.

    Cabbage and bacon in slow cooker with wooden spoon.

    Step 5: Season with salt and pepper to taste, if needed.

    Cooked cabbage and bacon in black bowl with forks on the side.

    Step 6: Serve the Irish cabbage and bacon side dish.

    Cooked cabbage and bacon in black bowl with fork.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Since this slow cooker cabbage and bacon is a side dish, it can be paired with many main dishes on St. Patrick's Day. One of the most popular dishes is the Shepherd's pie.
    • While a shepherd's pie is delicious, corned beef is also a great meat to have with this recipe and that is what I tend to pair it with because I love corned beef.
    • Cabbage can be a great side dish to most chicken, beef, or pork main dishes. You could also combine it with another side, such as mashed potatoes or a potato galette.
    • As for drinks, one of the most well-known alcoholic beverages associated with Ireland is the classic Guinness. For a unique touch, turn your Guinness into a cocktail with this Black Fog recipe.

    How to Store Leftover Cabbage and Bacon

    Store any leftover, slow cooker cabbage and bacon in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    Reheating Instructions

    You can reheat the leftovers in a pot on the stove over medium heat or use the microwave. It is actually not recommended to reheat leftovers using the slow cooker.

    Cooked cabbage and bacon in black bowl.

    More St. Patrick's Day Recipes to Consider

    • Green peppermint whipped cream in glass with curled black spoon.
      Peppermint Whipped Cream
    • Pea purée in white dish with whole peas and olive oil on top.
      Sweet Pea Purée
    • Beef black beer stew on black plate with fresh dill.
      St. Patrick's Day Beef and Guinness Stew
    • Beer cheese dip in saucepan with paprika and thyme.
      Beer Cheese Dip

    If you tried this Irish Slow Cooker Cabbage and Bacon Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Cabbage and bacon in bowl.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Irish Slow Cooker Cabbage & Bacon

    If you are out of luck in ideas for St. Patrick's Day side dishes, this delicious, Irish slow cooker cabbage and bacon recipe will save you on prep time. The chopped cabbage is soaked in chicken broth, bacon fat and white wine vinegar, giving a nice balance of salty and sour.
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine Irish
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 2 hours hours 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 2 hours hours 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 266kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Slow cooker

    Ingredients

    • 6 cups green cabbage cored and chopped into large squares
    • 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    • ½ cup chicken broth
    • 2 tablespoons butter optional
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper
    • 8 strips raw bacon chopped into squares
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add the cabbage, vinegar, broth, butter, salt and pepper to the slow cooker.
      6 cups green cabbage, 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar, ½ cup chicken broth, 2 tablespoons butter, 1 teaspoon salt, ¼ teaspoon ground pepper
      Raw green cabbage and butter in slow cooker.
    • Fry the bacon in a skillet over medium heat, until golden-brown .
      8 strips raw bacon
      Raw bacon strips in pan with tongs.
    • Add the bacon and the bacon grease to the slow cooker with the cabbage. Mix well.
      Bacon grease in pan pouring into slow cooker with cabbage and bacon.
    • Cover and cook on high for 2-3 hours or low for 3-4 hours, or until desired softness. (I like to give it another mix half way through.) Season with salt and pepper to taste, if needed.
      Cabbage and bacon in slow cooker with lid.
    • Serve!
      Cooked cabbage and bacon in black bowl with fork.

    Notes

    • Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • You can reheat the leftovers in a pot on the stove over medium heat or use the microwave. It is not recommended to reheat using the slow cooker.
    • If you're doubling the recipe, it's going to need more time.
    • If you use thick-cut bacon, I would recommending draining and discarding at least half of the grease.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 266kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 45mg | Sodium: 949mg | Potassium: 298mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 306IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 1mg

    Black Forest Cake Balls

    February 24, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    A scrumptious Black Forest cake becomes a bite-sized treat with these Black Forest cake balls. These cake balls are made from rich chocolate cake mixed with chopped-up cherries and coated in velvety white chocolate.

    Black Forest cake balls with whipped cream, maraschino cherries and grated chocolate.

    The cake is infused with Greek yogurt and cherry brandy to add a delicious melt-in-your-mouth texture to this dessert. They're fudgy, chocolatey and mini like my brownie bites.

    Serve these cake balls at your next party, or simply whip up a batch at home to enjoy whenever you're in the mood for a treat.

    Traditionally, Black Forest cake is a German dessert made from chocolate cake, whipped cream and cherries. The sweetness of the maraschino cherries brings out the delicious taste and texture of the chocolate cake, with whipped cream to offset the richness of the cocoa.

    To make this treat bite-sized, my recipe mixes chopped cherries directly into the cake batter along with rich cherry brandy. I like to freeze my cherries so that I always have some on hand.

    Some cooks find cake balls to be challenging, but using a cake pop maker makes this recipe a breeze. I have more cake pop flavor ideas if you're interested!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    • dark chocolate - Use a high quality chocolate bar for best results.
    • flour - Use all purpose or cake flour.
    • baking powder and baking soda - Leavening agents.
    • brown sugar - I use dark brown sugar.
    • cocoa powder - For extra chocolatey flavor.
    • plain Greek yogurt - Greek yogurt adds moisture to the cake balls and a subtle tangy flavor.
    • Kirschwasser - Kirschwasser means cherry water in German. It is a clear, colorless fruit brandy traditionally made from double distillation of morello cherries. You can substitute with a cherry brandy. For a non-alcoholic variation on this recipe, try replacing the cherry brandy with a similar-tasting ingredient like cherry jam or try using the juice from the jar of maraschino cherries.
    • eggs - I use large eggs.
    • maraschino cherries - You will find these in a jar in the baking aisle of the grocery store usually. Don't skimp on the cherries! That's what sets the Black Forest cake aside from traditional chocolate cake recipes.
    • white chocolate - Use a high quality white chocolate bar for the coating or white candy melts.
    • coconut oil - Optional. To thin out the chocolate coating and make it easier to coat the cake balls.
    • whipped cream - To top the cake balls with when serving.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredients and amounts.

    How to Make Black Forest Cake Balls

    1. Melt the dark chocolate, butter and milk using a double boiler method: simmer water in a pot and place a metal bowl on top (it shouldn't touch the water, just the steam). Add the chocolate, butter and milk to the bowl, stirring occasionally until fully melted and shiny.
    2. Alternatively, you can melt it in a microwaveable bowl for 20 seconds at a time, stirring each time, until fully melted. Let the chocolate mixture cool down while you go on to the next steps.
    3. Mix the flour, baking powder, baking soda, brown sugar and cocoa powder in a large bowl.
    4. Add the Greek yogurt, kirsch/cherry brandy, beaten eggs and the melted chocolate mixture. Mix with a whisk until combined. Fold in the cherries.
    5. Plug in a cake pop maker to preheat (there should be an indicator light to let you know when it's ready).
    6. Transfer the batter to a piping bag and fill the cake pop maker holes, or simply use a teaspoon to fill them (careful not to overfill the cavities).
    7. Close the lid and bake each batch for 3-4 minutes. You'll know they are ready when you insert a toothpick into the center and it comes out clean. Let the cake balls cool as you prepare the coating.
    8. Melt the white chocolate with the coconut oil in a deep bowl (again using a double boiler method or microwave). The coconut oil is optional; it thins the chocolate out, making it easier to coat the cake balls.
    9. Coat each cake ball with the melted white chocolate by dipping them in the chocolate with a fork or spoon, and tapping the excess chocolate off. Then, place them on a wax paper-lined baking sheet and let them cool at room temperature or in the refrigerator for around 1 hour, or until chocolate is set.
    10. Once they are solid, serve on a plate topped with the shaved chocolate curls, whipped cream and extra maraschino cherries.
    Black Forest cake balls stacked on plate, one cut open with spoon.

    Serving Suggestions

    • When you serve these cake balls, consider dabbing each ball with a squirt of whipped cream and adding a maraschino cherry.
    • If you're not a fan of whipped cream, you could also use a toothpick to hold the cherries in place. It would be more like a cake ball dessert skewer.
    • For best results, chill these cake pops in the fridge for 30 minutes to an hour so that the chocolate sets before serving. Leaving them out at room temperature is okay too, if you have the time.
    • These cake pops are intended for adults, as they contain alcohol. Do not serve them to children.

    Storage

    • Fridge Storage: They can be stored, covered, in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. Lining the container with a piece of paper towel can help with moisture.
    • Freezer Storage: For long-term storage, you can store your cake balls in the freezer for up to six weeks and thaw them out when they're ready to be served. Wait for serving to bring out the whipped cream and chocolate shavings.
    Black Forest cake balls stacked on plate, cut open with whipped cream.

    More Bite-Size Treats to Try

    • Margarita cake pops on plate.
      Margarita Cake Pops
    • Maple bacon cake pops on plate.
      Maple Bacon Cake Pops
    • Naked chocolate cake pops on black dish with yellow cloth.
      Naked Cake Pops
    • Pancake cake pops on a white plate with polka dots, a jar of maple syrup in the background.
      Pancake Cake Pops

    If you tried this Black Forest Cake Balls Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Black Forest cake balls stacked on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Black Forest Cake Balls

    A scrumptious Black Forest cake becomes a bite-sized treat with these Black Forest cake balls. After a quick and easy mix of the chocolate batter with delightful cherry bits, these cake balls bake in only minutes and are then coated in white chocolate.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American, German
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 42 cake balls
    Calories 123kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Cake Pop Maker
    • Baking sheet

    Ingredients

    For the Cake Batter

    • 2.5 ounces dark chocolate 75 grams
    • ½ cup butter
    • ¼ cup milk
    • ¾ cup flour
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1 cup brown sugar
    • 1 tablespoon cocoa powder
    • 2 tablespoons plain Greek yogurt
    • ¼ cup Kirschwasser or cherry brandy
    • 2 eggs beaten
    • ⅓ cup maraschino cherries chopped into small pieces

    For the Coating

    • 13 ounces white chocolate 375 grams
    • 2 tablespoons coconut oil optional

    For the Garnishes

    • maraschino cherries
    • dark chocolate shaved
    • whipped cream
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Melt the dark chocolate, butter and milk using a double boiler method: simmer water in a pot and place a metal bowl on top (it shouldn't touch the water, just the steam). Add the chocolate, butter and milk to the bowl, stirring occasionally until fully melted and shiny.
      Alternatively: you can melt it in a microwaveable bowl for 20 seconds at a time, stirring each time, until fully melted.
    • Let the chocolate mixture cool down while you go on to the next steps.
    • Mix the flour, baking powder, baking soda, brown sugar and cocoa powder in a large bowl.
    • Add the Greek yogurt, kirsch/cherry brandy, beaten eggs and the melted chocolate mixture. Mix with a whisk until combined. Fold in the cherries.
    • Plug in the cake pop maker to preheat (there should be an indicator light to let you know when it's ready).
    • Transfer the batter to a piping bag and fill the cake pop maker holes, or simply use a teaspoon to fill them (careful not to overfill the cavities).
    • Close the lid and bake each batch for 3-4 minutes. You'll know they are ready when you insert a toothpick into the center and it comes out clean. Let the cake balls cool as you prepare the coating.
    • Melt the white chocolate with the coconut oil in a deep bowl (again using a double boiler method or microwave). The coconut oil is optional; it thins the chocolate out, making it easier to coat the cake balls.
    • Coat each cake ball with the melted white chocolate by dipping them in the chocolate with a fork or spoon, and tapping the excess chocolate off. Then, place them on a wax paper-lined baking sheet and let them cool at room temperature or in the refrigerator for around 1 hour, or until chocolate is set.
    • Once they are solid, serve on a plate topped with the shaved chocolate curls, whipped cream and extra maraschino cherries.

    Notes

    • These cake pops are intended for adults, as they contain alcohol. Do not serve them to children.
    • You can swap the 'Kirschwasser or cherry brandy' for maraschino cherry juice to make them non-alcoholic.
    • They can be stored, covered, in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. Lining the container with a piece of paper towel can help with moisture.
    • For long-term storage, you can store your cake balls in the freezer for up to six weeks and thaw them out when they're ready to be served. Wait for serving to bring out the whipped cream and chocolate shavings.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 123kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 65mg | Potassium: 80mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 84IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Make Cabbage Rolls

    February 22, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Cabbage rolls may look complicated, but this recipe is fairly easy to prepare, especially as I guide you step-by-step. Here are some tips and information on how to make cabbage rolls using an old, authentic European recipe that's been a part of my childhood.

    Cooked cabbage rolls stacked on blue plate.

    These cabbage rolls are wrapped in green sour cabbage leaves and filled with a savory mixture of rice, onion, smoky ground pork and simple seasonings. The brown sugar balances well with the salty ground pork and smoky bacon and the rice makes the rolls extra filling.

    In our home when I was growing up, we always had a full meal consisting of sausage, these cabbage rolls, perogies and a salad.

    I have a few more German/Austrian family recipes you might like including this marzipan dessert, cheese strudel and grilled bratwurst.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    An Old European Recipe

    The homemade stuffed cabbage rolls origin is unclear, but they are common in Europe, Western Asia, Northern China, and parts of North Africa.

    There are different versions of cabbage rolls around the world: Holishkes, which are smothered in tomato sauce, are part of Jewish tradition. Romania uses a base of tomato or dill, or a combination of both. The filling in the Hungarian version contains egg and the rolls are topped with sour cream. These are just a few of the many versions out there.

    This specific recipe came from European settlers in a small Canadian prairie settlement where I grew up. The recipe was so popular that almost the whole village knew it and it is still commonly prepared for town gatherings.

    It was published in a village recipe book titled 'Hospice Family Favorites'. The original recipe's instructions and ingredient amounts were made to feed a very large crowd of people.

    My mom and I have updated the recipe to be more detailed and for a smaller crowd. You can scale it up if needed. I've also included extra tips, instructions for baking them in the oven, slow cooker and for freezing the raw rolls.

    Ingredients

    Cabbage roll ingredients labeled.

    This recipe makes between 48 and 60 rolls, depending on the size of the cabbage leaves and how much filling is added. This equals approximately ½ a canner.

    • medium grain rice - Also known as Calrose rice. When cooked it becomes soft and slightly sticky, perfect for staying in tact in the cabbage roll. It's also mild in flavor and absorbs flavor well.
    • ground pork and ground bacon ends - If you ask around, you might find that some meat markets offer up 'cabbage roll meat'. In the village's meat market where this recipe comes from, it is basically a 50/50 mix of ground pork and ground bacon ends.
    • onions - I use yellow onions.
    • brown sugar - Just a touch to enhance the flavors.
    • large sour cabbage leaves - My mom grows and sours the cabbage leaves herself, but you should be able to find heads of sour cabbage in the supermarket.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: Many recipes call for baking the cabbage rolls with tomato sauce instead of water. This recipe, without the tomato sauce, is the one I grew up on and prefer, but feel free to try it.

    Steps for How to Make Cabbage Rolls

    Hand cutting cabbage leaf with paring knife.

    Step 1: Trim Ribs from Cabbage Leaves. Trim the rib of the cabbage leaves off, using a paring knife. This is in the center of the cabbage leaf. It is easier to roll the leaf when the thick, outer part of the rib has been removed.

    Cabbage leaf cut into 3 pieces on cutting board.

    Step 2: Cut the Large Cabbage Leaves. If the leaves are large, you can cut them into smaller pieces (we cut ours into 2 to 3 pieces each).

    Chef's Note: The leaves should be approximately the size of your hand, for a standard cabbage roll size. You can go smaller or larger if you would like, but keep in mind, you will need to change the amount of filling you add.

    Cabbage roll meat mixture getting mixed together.

    Step 3: Prepare the Cabbage Roll Filling. In a large bowl, mix together the rice, meat, onions, brown sugar and spices.

    Cabbage roll getting filled and rolled up.

    Step 4: Add the Filling and Roll Them Up. Roll approximately 1 heaping tablespoon (or more for larger leaves) of the mixture up into each sour cabbage leaf.

    Cabbage roll in hand.

    Step 5: Push the Ends In. Close the ends by pushing them into the roll.

    Cabbage roll in hand.

    Step 6. Repeat. Repeat with the remaining leaves and filling.

    Baking Instructions

    If the cabbage rolls were frozen, thaw them in the refrigerator. I like to thaw them directly in the dish I will be baking them in. If fresh, go straight to step 1 below.

    Unbaked cabbage rolls in casserole dish.

    Step 1: Boil Water & Arrange Cabbage Rolls in Dish. Preheat the oven to 350°F. Boil some water in a kettle. Arrange the cabbage rolls in a casserole dish. If you are baking a large amount at once, they can be layered on top of each other.

    Unbaked cabbage rolls in casserole dish with boiling water.

    Step 2: Pour Boiling Water Over the Rolls. Pour just enough boiling water over the cabbage rolls to cover them.

    Unbaked cabbage rolls in casserole dish with lid.

    Step 3: Cover and Bake. Cover the casserole dish with a lid and bake in the preheated oven for 1 hour.

    Baked cabbage rolls in casserole dish.

    Step 4. Rest. Remove from oven and let sit for 5 to 10 minutes with the lid on. If there is water left in the casserole dish afterwards, you can drain it.

    Cooked cabbage roll cut open.

    Step 5: Serve. Serve the cabbage rolls!

    Slow Cooker Instructions

    1. Layer the uncooked cabbage rolls in the crock pot.
    2. Pour boiling water over top (just enough to almost cover them).
    3. Cook on high for at least 4 hours or on low for 8 hours.

    How To Freeze Raw Cabbage Rolls

    You can freeze the cabbage rolls before cooking them. Follow the instructions below:

    Unbaked cabbage rolls on sheet pan.

    Step 1: Place Rolls on Sheet Pan. Place the freshly made raw cabbage rolls on a sheet pan lined with wax paper. Transfer them to the freezer for a few hours or overnight. (This is so they don't stick together once frozen.)

    Cabbage rolls in freezer bag.

    Step 2: Transfer to Bags and Back to the Freezer. Transfer the rolls to a freezer bag or air-tight container and freeze until ready to bake. I like to add 1 dozen to each bag.

    Pro Tip: When you are ready to prepare them, just thaw them in the refrigerator, in the dish that you will bake them in. That way you can avoid handling them when soft, and help keep their shape/keep the stuffing in the roll.

    Now you know how to make cabbage rolls that are authentic as well as delicious! You can check out more amazing main course recipes here or some step by step cooking tutorials.

    Cooked cabbage rolls stacked on blue plate.

    What to Serve with Cabbage Rolls

    Sides. Cabbage rolls are usually served as a main dish, so it is good to have a side dish with them. Some of the most common side dishes are mashed potatoes or perogies, egg noodles, roasted vegetables (such as this roasted white asparagus), or rye bread.

    Drinks. Red wines like Malbec or Zinfandel pair well, working with the meat and sour cabbage flavors.

    Dessert. For dessert I like to serve it with my German Black Forest cake balls.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you make cabbage rolls less sour?

    Although many people really enjoy the taste of sour cabbage leaves (like me), they may be too sour for some people. If you wish to cut the sourness down a little, soak them in water for an hour or two. You can also use blanched cabbage leaves, instead of fermented.

    Are cabbage rolls German or Polish?

    There are different variations of cabbage rolls including from Poland, Germany, Ukraine, Romania, Hungary etc.

    What is the best type of cabbage for cabbage rolls?

    Green cabbage works well and it's easy to find in any grocery store. Savoy cabbage is very similar to green cabbage; it has a round head with loose, crinkled leaves that are tender and less compact, making them great for cabbage rolls.

    Why is my cabbage tough on my cabbage rolls?

    If your cooked cabbage is tough, it's probably because it hasn't finished cooking completely. Keep cooking the rolls until they are soft. Also, letting them rest after cooking is an important step.

    Cooked cabbage rolls stacked on blue plate.

    ❤️More Cabbage Recipes You Will Love

    • Cabbage and bacon in bowl.
      Irish Slow Cooker Cabbage & Bacon
    • Red cabbage shredded with knife.
      How to Shred Cabbage 3 Ways
    • Ground beef stir fry with veggies in bowl with chopsticks.
      Ground Beef Stir Fry
    • Kimchi in a jar and on a fork.
      How to Make Kimchi at Home

    Do you like your cabbage rolls sour or plain? With or without 🍅tomato sauce? If you tried this recipe tutorial for How to Make Cabbage Rolls or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Cabbage rolls stacked on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Authentic Cabbage Rolls (Step by Step)

    Here is an old, authentic European recipe for how to make cabbage rolls step by step. They're wrapped in green sour cabbage leaves and filled with a savory mixture of rice, onion, smoky ground pork and simple seasonings.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine German, Ukrainian
    Prep Time 35 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 48 cabbage rolls
    Calories 215kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Casserole Dish

    Ingredients

    • 2 pounds short grain rice
    • 1.75 pounds ground pork
    • 1.75 pounds ground bacon ends
    • 1.25 pounds yellow onions chopped
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar
    • 1 tablespoon salt
    • 1 ¼ teaspoon pepper
    • 20 large sour cabbage leaves this is only approximate - it will depend on the size of your leaves
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    Make the Cabbage Rolls

    • Trim the rib of the cabbage leaves off, using a paring knife (just the thick part that sticks out). This will make it easier to roll up.
      Hand cutting cabbage leaf with paring knife.
    • If the leaves are large, you can cut them into smaller pieces (we cut ours into 2 to 3 pieces each). They should be approximately the size of your hand, for a standard cabbage roll size. You can go smaller or larger if you would like, but keep in mind, you will need to change the amount of filling you add.
      Cabbage leaf cut into 3 pieces on cutting board.
    • In a large bowl, mix together the rice, meat, onions, brown sugar and spices.
      Hands mixing cabbage roll stuffing in bowl.
    • Roll approximately 1 heaping tablespoon (or more for larger leaves) of the mixture up into each sour cabbage leaf.
      Cabbage leaf with cabbage roll stuffing in hand.
    • Close the ends by pushing them into the roll. Now you can either freeze or cook the cabbage rolls (see below).
      Cabbage roll in hand.

    Baking Instructions

    • If the cabbage rolls were frozen, thaw them in the refrigerator first. I like to thaw them directly in the dish I will be baking them in.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Boil some water in a kettle. Arrange the cabbage rolls in a casserole dish. If you are baking a large amount at once, they can be layered on top of each other.
      Unbaked cabbage rolls in casserole dish.
    • Pour just enough boiling water over the cabbage rolls to cover them.
      Unbaked cabbage rolls in casserole dish with boiling water.
    • Cover the casserole dish with a lid and bake in the preheated oven for 1 hour. Remove from oven and let sit for 5 to 10 minutes with the lid on. If there is water left in the casserole dish afterwards, you can drain it.
      Unbaked cabbage rolls in casserole dish with lid.
    • Serve.
      Cooked cabbage roll cut open.

    Slow Cooker Instructions

    • Layer the uncooked cabbage rolls in the crock pot. Pour boiling water over top (just enough to almost cover them). Cook on high for at least 4 hours or on low for 8 hours.

    How To Freeze Raw Cabbage Rolls

    • Place the freshly made raw cabbage rolls on a sheet pan lined with wax paper. Transfer them to the freezer for a few hours or overnight. (This is so they don't stick together once frozen.)
      Unbaked cabbage rolls on sheet pan.
    • Transfer the cabbage rolls to a freezer bag or air-tight container and freeze until ready to bake.
      Cabbage rolls in freezer bag.

    Notes

    • This recipe makes between 48 and 60 cabbage rolls, depending on the size of the cabbage leaves and how much filling is added.
    • This equals approximately ½ a canner.
    • Although many people really enjoy the taste of sour cabbage leaves (like me), they may be too sour for some people. If you wish to cut the sourness down a little, soak them in water for an hour or two. You can also use blanched cabbage leaves, instead of fermented.
    • If you ask around, you might find that some meat markets offer up 'cabbage roll meat'. In the village's meat market where this recipe comes from, it is basically a 50/50 mix of ground pork and ground bacon ends.
    • Many recipes call for baking the cabbage rolls with tomato sauce instead of water. This recipe, without the tomato sauce, is the one I grew up on and prefer, but feel free to try it.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 215kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 35mg | Sodium: 389mg | Potassium: 105mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 101IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 1mg

    Margarita Cake Pops

    February 17, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Get your margarita fix with these bite-sized margarita cake pops that are moist, sweet and bursting with flavor. These treats start with a base of white cake that's made from scratch right in your own kitchen and only take a few minutes to bake.

    Margarita cake pops on plate with lime wedges and sea salt.

    A touch of tequila is added to the batter and the glaze. It's the perfect boozy treat for all of your spring and summer backyard barbecues, get-togethers with friends, summer picnics and late-night celebrations.

    You likely won't be getting drunk off these cake balls, but make no mistake--these cake pops are the perfect treat for anyone who likes to have some fun and enjoy themselves at a party. You could even try serving them with an actual slushy margarita in hand for a margarita-themed gathering.

    I also have this tutorial for how to make cake pops in a silicone mold and how to make cake pops with cake mix. You can also check out more cake pop flavors.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🍋‍🟩Margarita Cake Pop Ingredients

    Margarita cake pop ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • milk - You can substitute with water for the batter.
    • tequila - You will need tequila for the batter and for the coating.
    • butter - Melted.
    • eggs - Large eggs.
    • lime zest + juice - From fresh limes.
    • flour - Regular all-purpose flour is perfect.
    • sugar - You will need white sugar and powdered sugar.
    • baking powder - To give the cake pops that light, airy texture.
    • salt - Regular salt for the batter and sea salt to garnish.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: These cake pops are intended for adults, as they contain alcohol. Do not serve them to children.

    🥣How to Make Them

    Margarita cake pop batter liquid ingredients in bowl with whisk.

    Step 1. Add the milk, tequila, melted butter, eggs and lime zest into a large bowl. Combine well with a whisk or electric hand mixer.

    Flour and sugar in bowl.

    Step 2. Mix all of the dry ingredients in a separate bowl.

    Margarita cake pop batter in bowl with whisk.

    Step 3. Start incorporating the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients. Whisk until well combined.

    Margarita cake pop batter squeezing out of pastry bag into cake pop maker holes.

    Step 4. Plug in the cake pop maker to preheat it. Transfer the batter to a piping bag. Fill the holes with the batter, to just below the top.

    👩🏻‍🍳Chef's Note: Alternatively, you can use a teaspoon to transfer the batter to the cavities.

    Margarita cake pop batter in cake pop maker holes.

    Step 5. Close the lid and bake for about 4 minutes. Remove from the cake pop maker and repeat until you finish the batter.

    Glaze in bowl with spoon.

    Step 6. To make the glaze, whisk the powdered sugar with the tequila and lime juice until smooth.

    Margarita cake balls with glaze on plate.

    Step 7. When the cake pops are cool, dip the cake pops into the glaze to coat them. The cake pop glaze does not have to completely cover the cake pop.

    Margarita cake ball on plate with glaze and sea salt.

    Step 8. Sprinkle with sea salt and lime zest. Then insert a treat stick into the center of each cake pop.

    👩🏻‍🍳Chef's Note: You can leave the treat sticks out if you would like them to be cake balls instead.

    Margarita cake pops on plate with lime wedge.

    Step 9. Let the glaze harden and enjoy!

    🌡️Storage

    • If you're attending a party or a barbecue, store these cake balls (in a sealed container) in a cooler filled with ice to keep the glaze from melting.
    • And if you're partying at home, chill your margarita cake pops in the fridge for up to 1 month. Like your favorite margaritas, these cake pops are a treat that's best served cool.
    • They can also be stored, covered, at room temperature for up to 1 week.
    • Freeze them for up to 3 months.

    ✔️Joss' Tips

    • If you want to get fancy, try serving these cake pops with sparkling pieces of candied limes.
    • You can also add food coloring to make these cake balls a bright, summery treat.
    • Try different types of margarita salt or margarita sugar rim to bring out the classic flavor of your favorite alcoholic drink.
    • You can offer non-alcoholic variations for your sober friends by making a batch without the tequila. Just replace the tequila with more milk and make sure you know which batch is which--they'll look exactly the same unless you add food coloring to one of the batches.
    Margarita cake pops on small plate.

    ❤️More Bite Size Treats You Will Love

    • Marzipan ball dusted in icing sugar.
      Marzipan Balls
    • Naked chocolate cake pops on black dish with yellow cloth.
      Naked Cake Pops
    • Cranberry white chocolate cake pops sprinkled with cinnamon in decorative jar.
      Cranberry White Chocolate Cake Pops
    • Black Forest cake balls stacked on plate.
      Black Forest Cake Balls

    If you tried this 🍋‍🟩 Margarita Cake Pops Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Margarita cake pops on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Cake Pop Maker Margarita Cake Pops

    Get your margarita fix with these bite-sized margarita cake pops that are moist, sweet and bursting with flavor. It's the perfect boozy treat for all your spring and summer get-togethers.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American, Mexican
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 25 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 4 minutes minutes
    Total Time 29 minutes minutes
    Servings 48 cake pops
    Calories 74kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Cake Pop Maker
    • Green lollipop sticks

    Ingredients

    For the Cake Pops

    • ½ cup milk
    • 2 tablespoons tequila
    • ½ cup butter melted
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 teaspoon lime zest
    • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 cup sugar
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt

    For the Coating

    • 2 cups powdered sugar
    • 2 tablespoons tequila
    • 4 teaspoons lime juice
    • course sea salt to garnish
    • lime zest to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add the milk, tequila, melted butter, eggs and lime zest into a large bowl. Combine well with a whisk or electric hand mixer.
    • Mix all of the dry ingredients in a separate bowl.
    • Start incorporating the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients. Whisk until well combined.
    • Plug in the cake pop maker to preheat it. Transfer the batter to a piping bag. Fill the holes with the batter, to just below the top. Alternatively, you can use a teaspoon.
    • Close the lid and bake for about 4 minutes. Remove from the cake pop maker and repeat until you finish the batter.
    • To make the glaze, whisk the powdered sugar with the tequila and lime juice until smooth.
    • When the cake pops are cool, dip the cake pops into the glaze to coat them. The glaze does not have to completely cover the cake pop.
    • Sprinkle with sea salt and lime zest. Then insert a treat stick into the center of each cake pop. (You can leave the treat sticks out if you would like them to be cake balls instead.)
    • Let the glaze harden and enjoy!

    Notes

    • These cake pops are intended for adults, as they contain alcohol. Do not serve them to children.
    • If you're attending a party or a barbecue, store these cake balls (in a sealed container) in a cooler filled with ice to keep the glaze from melting.
    • And if you're partying at home, chill your cake pops in the fridge for up to 1 month. Like your favorite margaritas, these cake pops are a treat that's best served cool.
    • They can also be stored, covered, at room temperature for up to 1 week.
    • Freeze them for up to 3 months.
    • You can offer non-alcoholic variations for your sober friends by making a batch without the tequila. Just replace the tequila with more milk and make sure you know which batch is which--they'll look exactly the same unless you add food coloring to one of the batches.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 74kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 12mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 22mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 73IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 1mg
    « Previous Page
    Next Page »
    Joss Dyckson author photo.

    Hi, I'm Joss!

    I am the creator and editor of In the Kitch. I am inviting you on this food journey with me to learn, grow and bring out that inner chef in you. I hope to inspire you to get creative in your own kitchen!

    More about me →

    Patriotic Recipes

    • 4th of July themed charcuterie board on red plate with red, white and blue stars.
      4th of July Charcuterie Board
    • Grilled burgers on metal flipper, grill grates in the background.
      How to Grill Frozen Burgers
    • Blueberry mojito mocktail with fresh mint in cocktail glass.
      Blueberry Mojito Mocktail
    • 4th of July pulled pork sliders on parchment lined serving tray.
      4th of July Pulled Pork Sliders
    • Canada Day raspberry cheesecake in jars with red and white spoons.
      Raspberry Cheesecake in a Jar (Canada Day Dessert)
    • Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with watermelon swizzle stick.
      Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail

    Popular

    • Cake pop frosting in bowl with spatula.
      Cake Pop Frosting & Coating
    • Collage of coffee syrups.
      12 Coffee Syrup Recipes to Upgrade Your Brew
    • Pictures of passion fruit recipes collage.
      16 Easy Passion Fruit Recipes To Make This Summer
    • BBQ buffalo wings in dish with sauce on the side.
      37 Easy and Delicious Electric Skillet Recipes
    • Peanut butter soup in a speckled bowl.
      Peanut Butter Soup
    • Corn tortillas on foil.
      How to Heat Corn Tortillas (3 Ways)

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    In the Kitch

    • Privacy Policy
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Disclaimer
    • Accessibility Statement

    About

    • About
    • The Team

    Contact

    • Contact

    As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Copyright © 2026 In the Kitch

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required